<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="fr">
	<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Jdobbels</id>
	<title>MappingDoc - Contributions de l’utilisateur [fr]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Jdobbels"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/wiki/Sp%C3%A9cial:Contributions/Jdobbels"/>
	<updated>2026-04-06T12:24:12Z</updated>
	<subtitle>Contributions de l’utilisateur</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.32.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=OPALE:10.0:Utilisation:_Manipulations_et_astuces&amp;diff=30783</id>
		<title>OPALE:10.0:Utilisation: Manipulations et astuces</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=OPALE:10.0:Utilisation:_Manipulations_et_astuces&amp;diff=30783"/>
		<updated>2020-03-17T15:41:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Déplacer un objet''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déplacer un élément du fond de page, il doit être sélectionné. Cliquer sur l’icône [[File:Iconeselectin.PNG|frameless|120px ]] puis sur l’élément à déplacer. Pour sélectionner plusieurs éléments, maintenir la touche &amp;quot;Ctrl&amp;quot; enfoncée puis sélectionner chaque élément. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’objet apparait en surbrillance avec des indicateurs de positionnement/dimensionnement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Une fois l’objet sélectionné, il peut être déplacé à l’aide de la souris ou des flèches du clavier (pavé numérique). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si la position exacte de cet élément est connue, les coordonnées peuvent être saisies directement (X et Y) ainsi que les dimensions (L et H), dans la partie gauche de la barre d’état. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Redimensionner un objet''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le redimensionnement d’un objet s’effectue de différentes manières : &lt;br /&gt;
* A l’aide de la souris : cliquer (sans relâcher) sur l’un des indicateurs (carrés ou ronds) entourant l’objet puis déplacer l’indicateur jusqu’à la position souhaitée. L’objet suit visuellement le mouvement permettant le contrôle en temps réel du redimensionnement effectué. Les coordonnées et dimensions de l’objet dans la barre d’état suivent également le mouvement.  &lt;br /&gt;
* En saisissant directement la longueur et la hauteur de l’objet (voir ci-dessus : cases « L » et « H »). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Modifier une forme géométrique ou une zone texte''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par les options correspondantes de la barre d’outils, par le menu contextuel (clic droit) ou depuis les propriétés de l’objet sur une zone géométrique ou une zone texte, il est possible de modifier : &lt;br /&gt;
* Le contour : type, épaisseur, couleur. &lt;br /&gt;
* Le remplissage : aucun, tramé, hachuré, dégradé, en couleur ou non. &lt;br /&gt;
* L’orientation (rotation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Conseil de conception :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour l’utilisation des rotations, il est conseillé de le faire objet par objet et non sur plusieurs objets sélectionnés en même temps. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignements d’un objet''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu’un objet est sélectionné, le menu contextuel propose des options d’Alignement pour cet objet individuel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Allignement.PNG|700px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les alignements à gauche, à droite, en haut et en bas permettent de « coller » l’objet aux marges correspondantes définies pour le modèle. Les trois autres options permettent de centrer l’objet sur la page : &lt;br /&gt;
* horizontalement sans changer sa position verticale.&lt;br /&gt;
* verticalement sans changer sa position horizontale.&lt;br /&gt;
* au milieu exact de la page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignements de plusieurs objets''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est également possible d’aligner plusieurs objets entre eux. Une fois les éléments sélectionnés, le menu contextuel propose des options d’alignement pour cet ensemble d’éléments.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Alignementsplus.PNG|500px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement « Sur la page » : si l’option est sélectionnée alors toutes les possibilités d’alignement seront appliquées sur la page en entier et non pas que sur la zone occupée par les objets sélectionnés.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement à gauche repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus à gauche.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement à droite repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus à droite.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement en haut repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus haut.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement en bas repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus bas.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Le centrage horizontal repositionne tous les objets au centre de l’espace compris entre le plus à gauche et le plus à droite, sans modifier les positions verticales des objets.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Le centrage vertical repositionne tous les objets au centre de l’espace compris entre le plus haut et le plus bas, sans modifier les positions horizontales des objets.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Le centrage au milieu combine les deux options précédentes.  &lt;br /&gt;
* La répartition verticale permet de répartir uniformément les objets sélectionnés sur toute la verticale de l’espace.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement « En ligne » repositionne les objets verticalement en forçant l’espacement vertical entre chacun avec la valeur précisée. Très utile pour uniformiser la hauteur de lignes d’un tableau par exemple. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tracer une ligne droite'''   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour tracer une ligne parfaitement rectiligne (horizontale ou verticale), appuyer sur la touche &amp;quot;Shift&amp;quot; ou &amp;quot;Ctrl&amp;quot; du clavier pendant le tracé de cette ligne à la souris. &lt;br /&gt;
Cette option peut également être activée par défaut dans les Préférences de l’application. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tracer un tableau'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir un tableau parfaitement dessiné et aligné, sans utilisé l’option Tableau statique : &lt;br /&gt;
* tracer d’abord le rectangle du contour du tableau.&lt;br /&gt;
* tracer des lignes verticales pour définir les colonnes.&lt;br /&gt;
* tracer éventuellement des traits horizontaux pour définir les lignes si besoin (entêtes de colonnes par exemple).&lt;br /&gt;
* sélectionner enfin l’ensemble des éléments du tableau, puis appuyer sur la touche « a » minuscule du clavier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tab1D.PNG|500px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tab2D.PNG|500px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Remarque :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cette aide à la conception est également opérationnelle en partie Dynamique du projet.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remplacement de caractère'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L'objectif est d'expliquer comment remplacer une chaîne de caractères du fichier d'entrée par une autre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le principe de fonctionnement est l'utilisation d'un fichier texte comme table de correspondance entre la valeur à remplacer et la nouvelle valeur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser cette table de correspondance, il faut :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Définir la zone en mode Type = '''Texte''' / Sous-type = '''Substitution'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image79.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Terminer et générer la maquette&lt;br /&gt;
*Ouvrir le fichier ''ReplaceValue.txt'' dans un éditeur de texte (type Notepad mais pas Word). La syntaxe du fichier est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Valeur à remplacer ''Tabulation'' Nouvelle valeur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image80.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ici, le caractère &amp;amp;quot;''']'''&amp;amp;quot; sera remplacé par le caractère &amp;amp;quot;'''&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;quot; et le &amp;amp;quot;'''Nom'''&amp;amp;quot; sera remplacé par &amp;amp;quot;'''Name'''&amp;amp;quot; (si la valeur à remplacer se trouve dans une zone de Type Texte \ Substitution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning}} '''Attention:''' il est impératifs que le fichier replacevalue.txt ai le même encodage que le projet Onyx Designer. Par exemple, replaceValue.txt doit être unicode si le projet est unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Sauvegarder le fichier ''ReplaceValue.txt'' dans le sous-répertoire '''lgobitmap''' de Mapping (par défaut /apps/mapping/import/lgobitmap sur Unix)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remplacement de caractère avec des balises PCL'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si votre projet est en non-unicode et générée en PCL, il est possible d'ajouter du code PCL pour modifier, par exemple la police, sa taille  ou son format. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning}}'''Attention: '''Pour modifier une police en PCL, il est impératif de reprécisé l'id de la police, sa taille et son format. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exemple de replaceValue pour modifier le texte en arial gras taille 12:&lt;br /&gt;
* ajouter les valeurs suivantes dans le fichier replacevalue.txt:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:OPALE_Designer_ReplaceValuePCL.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;�(s&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; indique un chagement de police.&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3b&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; permet de modifier le format. le chiffre 3 correspond au format gras et 0 au format standard.&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;12v&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; indique la taille de la police.&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;16602T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; donne l'id de la police en PCL (16602 correspond à la police Arial)&lt;br /&gt;
* Placer les balises &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ARIAL_12_BOLD&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; et &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ARIAL_12_BOLD&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; respectivement au début et à la fin de la zone de texte que vous souhaitez passer en arial gras.&lt;br /&gt;
* la liste des id de police PCL peut-être trouvé dans [https://www.undocprint.org/_media/formats/page_description_languages/pcl5_comparison_guide.pdf ce document à la page 174]&lt;br /&gt;
* la liste des formats de police peut-être trouvé dans [http://www.hp.com/ctg/Manual/bpl13210.pdf ce document à la page 138]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=OPALE:10.0:Utilisation:_Manipulations_et_astuces&amp;diff=30782</id>
		<title>OPALE:10.0:Utilisation: Manipulations et astuces</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=OPALE:10.0:Utilisation:_Manipulations_et_astuces&amp;diff=30782"/>
		<updated>2020-03-17T15:38:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Déplacer un objet''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déplacer un élément du fond de page, il doit être sélectionné. Cliquer sur l’icône [[File:Iconeselectin.PNG|frameless|120px ]] puis sur l’élément à déplacer. Pour sélectionner plusieurs éléments, maintenir la touche &amp;quot;Ctrl&amp;quot; enfoncée puis sélectionner chaque élément. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’objet apparait en surbrillance avec des indicateurs de positionnement/dimensionnement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Une fois l’objet sélectionné, il peut être déplacé à l’aide de la souris ou des flèches du clavier (pavé numérique). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si la position exacte de cet élément est connue, les coordonnées peuvent être saisies directement (X et Y) ainsi que les dimensions (L et H), dans la partie gauche de la barre d’état. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Redimensionner un objet''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le redimensionnement d’un objet s’effectue de différentes manières : &lt;br /&gt;
* A l’aide de la souris : cliquer (sans relâcher) sur l’un des indicateurs (carrés ou ronds) entourant l’objet puis déplacer l’indicateur jusqu’à la position souhaitée. L’objet suit visuellement le mouvement permettant le contrôle en temps réel du redimensionnement effectué. Les coordonnées et dimensions de l’objet dans la barre d’état suivent également le mouvement.  &lt;br /&gt;
* En saisissant directement la longueur et la hauteur de l’objet (voir ci-dessus : cases « L » et « H »). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Modifier une forme géométrique ou une zone texte''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par les options correspondantes de la barre d’outils, par le menu contextuel (clic droit) ou depuis les propriétés de l’objet sur une zone géométrique ou une zone texte, il est possible de modifier : &lt;br /&gt;
* Le contour : type, épaisseur, couleur. &lt;br /&gt;
* Le remplissage : aucun, tramé, hachuré, dégradé, en couleur ou non. &lt;br /&gt;
* L’orientation (rotation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Conseil de conception :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour l’utilisation des rotations, il est conseillé de le faire objet par objet et non sur plusieurs objets sélectionnés en même temps. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignements d’un objet''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu’un objet est sélectionné, le menu contextuel propose des options d’Alignement pour cet objet individuel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Allignement.PNG|700px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les alignements à gauche, à droite, en haut et en bas permettent de « coller » l’objet aux marges correspondantes définies pour le modèle. Les trois autres options permettent de centrer l’objet sur la page : &lt;br /&gt;
* horizontalement sans changer sa position verticale.&lt;br /&gt;
* verticalement sans changer sa position horizontale.&lt;br /&gt;
* au milieu exact de la page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignements de plusieurs objets''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est également possible d’aligner plusieurs objets entre eux. Une fois les éléments sélectionnés, le menu contextuel propose des options d’alignement pour cet ensemble d’éléments.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Alignementsplus.PNG|500px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement « Sur la page » : si l’option est sélectionnée alors toutes les possibilités d’alignement seront appliquées sur la page en entier et non pas que sur la zone occupée par les objets sélectionnés.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement à gauche repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus à gauche.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement à droite repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus à droite.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement en haut repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus haut.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement en bas repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus bas.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Le centrage horizontal repositionne tous les objets au centre de l’espace compris entre le plus à gauche et le plus à droite, sans modifier les positions verticales des objets.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Le centrage vertical repositionne tous les objets au centre de l’espace compris entre le plus haut et le plus bas, sans modifier les positions horizontales des objets.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Le centrage au milieu combine les deux options précédentes.  &lt;br /&gt;
* La répartition verticale permet de répartir uniformément les objets sélectionnés sur toute la verticale de l’espace.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement « En ligne » repositionne les objets verticalement en forçant l’espacement vertical entre chacun avec la valeur précisée. Très utile pour uniformiser la hauteur de lignes d’un tableau par exemple. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tracer une ligne droite'''   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour tracer une ligne parfaitement rectiligne (horizontale ou verticale), appuyer sur la touche &amp;quot;Shift&amp;quot; ou &amp;quot;Ctrl&amp;quot; du clavier pendant le tracé de cette ligne à la souris. &lt;br /&gt;
Cette option peut également être activée par défaut dans les Préférences de l’application. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tracer un tableau'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir un tableau parfaitement dessiné et aligné, sans utilisé l’option Tableau statique : &lt;br /&gt;
* tracer d’abord le rectangle du contour du tableau.&lt;br /&gt;
* tracer des lignes verticales pour définir les colonnes.&lt;br /&gt;
* tracer éventuellement des traits horizontaux pour définir les lignes si besoin (entêtes de colonnes par exemple).&lt;br /&gt;
* sélectionner enfin l’ensemble des éléments du tableau, puis appuyer sur la touche « a » minuscule du clavier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tab1D.PNG|500px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tab2D.PNG|500px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remplacement de caractère'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L'objectif est d'expliquer comment remplacer une chaîne de caractères du fichier d'entrée par une autre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le principe de fonctionnement est l'utilisation d'un fichier texte comme table de correspondance entre la valeur à remplacer et la nouvelle valeur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser cette table de correspondance, il faut :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Définir la zone en mode Type = '''Texte''' / Sous-type = '''Substitution'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image79.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Terminer et générer la maquette&lt;br /&gt;
*Ouvrir le fichier ''ReplaceValue.txt'' dans un éditeur de texte (type Notepad mais pas Word). La syntaxe du fichier est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Valeur à remplacer ''Tabulation'' Nouvelle valeur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image80.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ici, le caractère &amp;amp;quot;''']'''&amp;amp;quot; sera remplacé par le caractère &amp;amp;quot;'''&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;quot; et le &amp;amp;quot;'''Nom'''&amp;amp;quot; sera remplacé par &amp;amp;quot;'''Name'''&amp;amp;quot; (si la valeur à remplacer se trouve dans une zone de Type Texte \ Substitution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning}} '''Attention:''' il est impératifs que le fichier replacevalue.txt ai le même encodage que le projet Onyx Designer. Par exemple, replaceValue.txt doit être unicode si le projet est unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Sauvegarder le fichier ''ReplaceValue.txt'' dans le sous-répertoire '''lgobitmap''' de Mapping (par défaut /apps/mapping/import/lgobitmap sur Unix)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remplacement de caractère avec des balises PCL'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si votre projet est en non-unicode et générée en PCL, il est possible d'ajouter du code PCL pour modifier, par exemple la police, sa taille  ou son format. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning}}'''Attention: '''Pour modifier une police en PCL, il est impératif de reprécisé l'id de la police, sa taille et son format. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exemple de replaceValue pour modifier le texte en arial gras taille 12:&lt;br /&gt;
* ajouter les valeurs suivantes dans le fichier replacevalue.txt:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:OPALE_Designer_ReplaceValuePCL.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;�(s&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; indique un chagement de police.&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3b&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; permet de modifier le format. le chiffre 3 correspond au format gras et 0 au format standard.&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;12v&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; indique la taille de la police.&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;16602T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; donne l'id de la police en PCL (16602 correspond à la police Arial)&lt;br /&gt;
* Placer les balises &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ARIAL_12_BOLD&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; et &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ARIAL_12_BOLD&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; respectivement au début et à la fin de la zone de texte que vous souhaitez passer en arial gras.&lt;br /&gt;
* la liste des id de police PCL peut-être trouvé dans [https://www.undocprint.org/_media/formats/page_description_languages/pcl5_comparison_guide.pdf ce document à la page 174]&lt;br /&gt;
* la liste des formats de police peut-être trouvé dans [http://www.hp.com/ctg/Manual/bpl13210.pdf ce document à la page 138]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Remarque :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cette aide à la conception est également opérationnelle en partie Dynamique du projet.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=OPALE:10.0:Utilisation:_Manipulations_et_astuces&amp;diff=30781</id>
		<title>OPALE:10.0:Utilisation: Manipulations et astuces</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=OPALE:10.0:Utilisation:_Manipulations_et_astuces&amp;diff=30781"/>
		<updated>2020-03-17T15:37:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Déplacer un objet''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déplacer un élément du fond de page, il doit être sélectionné. Cliquer sur l’icône [[File:Iconeselectin.PNG|frameless|120px ]] puis sur l’élément à déplacer. Pour sélectionner plusieurs éléments, maintenir la touche &amp;quot;Ctrl&amp;quot; enfoncée puis sélectionner chaque élément. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’objet apparait en surbrillance avec des indicateurs de positionnement/dimensionnement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Une fois l’objet sélectionné, il peut être déplacé à l’aide de la souris ou des flèches du clavier (pavé numérique). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si la position exacte de cet élément est connue, les coordonnées peuvent être saisies directement (X et Y) ainsi que les dimensions (L et H), dans la partie gauche de la barre d’état. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Redimensionner un objet''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le redimensionnement d’un objet s’effectue de différentes manières : &lt;br /&gt;
* A l’aide de la souris : cliquer (sans relâcher) sur l’un des indicateurs (carrés ou ronds) entourant l’objet puis déplacer l’indicateur jusqu’à la position souhaitée. L’objet suit visuellement le mouvement permettant le contrôle en temps réel du redimensionnement effectué. Les coordonnées et dimensions de l’objet dans la barre d’état suivent également le mouvement.  &lt;br /&gt;
* En saisissant directement la longueur et la hauteur de l’objet (voir ci-dessus : cases « L » et « H »). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Modifier une forme géométrique ou une zone texte''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par les options correspondantes de la barre d’outils, par le menu contextuel (clic droit) ou depuis les propriétés de l’objet sur une zone géométrique ou une zone texte, il est possible de modifier : &lt;br /&gt;
* Le contour : type, épaisseur, couleur. &lt;br /&gt;
* Le remplissage : aucun, tramé, hachuré, dégradé, en couleur ou non. &lt;br /&gt;
* L’orientation (rotation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Conseil de conception :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour l’utilisation des rotations, il est conseillé de le faire objet par objet et non sur plusieurs objets sélectionnés en même temps. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignements d’un objet''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu’un objet est sélectionné, le menu contextuel propose des options d’Alignement pour cet objet individuel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Allignement.PNG|700px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les alignements à gauche, à droite, en haut et en bas permettent de « coller » l’objet aux marges correspondantes définies pour le modèle. Les trois autres options permettent de centrer l’objet sur la page : &lt;br /&gt;
* horizontalement sans changer sa position verticale.&lt;br /&gt;
* verticalement sans changer sa position horizontale.&lt;br /&gt;
* au milieu exact de la page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alignements de plusieurs objets''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est également possible d’aligner plusieurs objets entre eux. Une fois les éléments sélectionnés, le menu contextuel propose des options d’alignement pour cet ensemble d’éléments.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Alignementsplus.PNG|500px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement « Sur la page » : si l’option est sélectionnée alors toutes les possibilités d’alignement seront appliquées sur la page en entier et non pas que sur la zone occupée par les objets sélectionnés.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement à gauche repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus à gauche.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement à droite repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus à droite.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement en haut repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus haut.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement en bas repositionne tous les objets par rapport à celui le plus bas.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Le centrage horizontal repositionne tous les objets au centre de l’espace compris entre le plus à gauche et le plus à droite, sans modifier les positions verticales des objets.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Le centrage vertical repositionne tous les objets au centre de l’espace compris entre le plus haut et le plus bas, sans modifier les positions horizontales des objets.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Le centrage au milieu combine les deux options précédentes.  &lt;br /&gt;
* La répartition verticale permet de répartir uniformément les objets sélectionnés sur toute la verticale de l’espace.  &lt;br /&gt;
* L’alignement « En ligne » repositionne les objets verticalement en forçant l’espacement vertical entre chacun avec la valeur précisée. Très utile pour uniformiser la hauteur de lignes d’un tableau par exemple. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tracer une ligne droite'''   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour tracer une ligne parfaitement rectiligne (horizontale ou verticale), appuyer sur la touche &amp;quot;Shift&amp;quot; ou &amp;quot;Ctrl&amp;quot; du clavier pendant le tracé de cette ligne à la souris. &lt;br /&gt;
Cette option peut également être activée par défaut dans les Préférences de l’application. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tracer un tableau'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir un tableau parfaitement dessiné et aligné, sans utilisé l’option Tableau statique : &lt;br /&gt;
* tracer d’abord le rectangle du contour du tableau.&lt;br /&gt;
* tracer des lignes verticales pour définir les colonnes.&lt;br /&gt;
* tracer éventuellement des traits horizontaux pour définir les lignes si besoin (entêtes de colonnes par exemple).&lt;br /&gt;
* sélectionner enfin l’ensemble des éléments du tableau, puis appuyer sur la touche « a » minuscule du clavier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tab1D.PNG|500px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tab2D.PNG|500px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remplacement de caractère'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L'objectif est d'expliquer comment remplacer une chaîne de caractères du fichier d'entrée par une autre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le principe de fonctionnement est l'utilisation d'un fichier texte comme table de correspondance entre la valeur à remplacer et la nouvelle valeur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser cette table de correspondance, il faut :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Définir la zone en mode Type = '''Texte''' / Sous-type = '''Substitution'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image79.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Terminer et générer la maquette&lt;br /&gt;
*Ouvrir le fichier ''ReplaceValue.txt'' dans un éditeur de texte (type Notepad mais pas Word). La syntaxe du fichier est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Valeur à remplacer ''Tabulation'' Nouvelle valeur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image80.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ici, le caractère &amp;amp;quot;''']'''&amp;amp;quot; sera remplacé par le caractère &amp;amp;quot;'''&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;quot; et le &amp;amp;quot;'''Nom'''&amp;amp;quot; sera remplacé par &amp;amp;quot;'''Name'''&amp;amp;quot; (si la valeur à remplacer se trouve dans une zone de Type Texte \ Substitution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning}} '''Attention:''' il est impératifs que le fichier replacevalue.txt ai le même encodage que le projet Onyx Designer. Par exemple, replaceValue.txt doit être unicode si le projet est unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Sauvegarder le fichier ''ReplaceValue.txt'' dans le sous-répertoire '''lgobitmap''' de Mapping (par défaut /apps/mapping/import/lgobitmap sur Unix)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remplacement de caractère avec des balises PCL'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si votre projet est en non-unicode et générée en PCL, il est possible d'ajouter du code PCL pour modifier, par exemple la police, sa taille  ou son format. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning}}'''Attention: '''Pour modifier une police en PCL, il est impératif de reprécisé l'id de la police, sa taille et son format. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exemple de replaceValue pour modifier le texte en arial gras taille 12:&lt;br /&gt;
* ajouter les valeurs suivantes dans le fichier replacevalue.txt:&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:OPALE_Designer_ReplaceValuePCL.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;�(s&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; indique un chagement de police.&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3b&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; permet de modifier le format. le chiffre 3 correspond au format gras et 0 au format standard.&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;12v&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; indique la taille de la police.&lt;br /&gt;
:* La partie &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;16602T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; donne l'id de la police en PCL (16602 correspond à la police Arial)&lt;br /&gt;
* Placer les balises &amp;lt;ARIAL_12_BOLD&amp;gt; et &amp;lt;/ARIAL_12_BOLD&amp;gt; respectivement au début et à la fin de la zone de texte que vous souhaitez passer en arial gras.&lt;br /&gt;
* la liste des id de police PCL peut-être trouvé dans [https://www.undocprint.org/_media/formats/page_description_languages/pcl5_comparison_guide.pdf ce document à la page 174]&lt;br /&gt;
* la liste des formats de police peut-être trouvé dans [http://www.hp.com/ctg/Manual/bpl13210.pdf ce document à la page 138]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Remarque :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cette aide à la conception est également opérationnelle en partie Dynamique du projet.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Fichier:OPALE_Designer_ReplaceValuePCL.PNG&amp;diff=30780</id>
		<title>Fichier:OPALE Designer ReplaceValuePCL.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Fichier:OPALE_Designer_ReplaceValuePCL.PNG&amp;diff=30780"/>
		<updated>2020-03-17T15:09:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=M-Designer_8.0_Technical_Reference_Guide&amp;diff=30779</id>
		<title>M-Designer 8.0 Technical Reference Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=M-Designer_8.0_Technical_Reference_Guide&amp;diff=30779"/>
		<updated>2020-03-17T11:13:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : /* Font */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
===Objectives===&lt;br /&gt;
This document is the reference guide for the configuration and use of the M-Designer application, one of the modules of the Mapping Suite. We will introduce you to all the features of the application in this document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Guide applies to the M-designer software (version 8 and higher).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presentation of M-Designer===&lt;br /&gt;
M-Designer is the design and graphic composition module for documents. It is used to transform simple files of static data into high-quality graphic documents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software runs on Windows computers and has a user interface divided in two parts. The first part is a drawing type view for creating the page backgrounds (similar to pre-printed forms for printing) and the second is a dynamic view for retrieving, editing and presenting data.&lt;br /&gt;
Whether it is directly from a spool or reformatted using the M-Connect software, the data comes from raw files (AS/400 spool type) and data extractions from databases or from ERP and are presented &amp;quot;flat&amp;quot; (text format) or in XML format (compatible with M-designer – see 6.3.XML mode: syntax and specifications).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The design of the model (document template) is performed on the user terminal that is hosting the application with a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;preview&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; mode for validating the modifications as soon as they are made. During the design process, the document model is called an &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Designer project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
The template is then generated and imported on the M-Processing Server (iSeries, Unix/Linux or Windows) to be used in production. We call this an &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Designer Format&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
The install, update and uninstall procedures are set out in detail in the M-designer Installation and Update Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring M-Designer==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After installing M-Designer, the first key step is to configure the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Preferences&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (see 1) of the application. These can be opened in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;File&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; menu (see 2). These preferences are local to the current user and they are stored in the terminal's registry base under &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Mapping.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General===&lt;br /&gt;
The first tab of the Preferences window presents the general options of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a.Automatic save&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to force an automatic backup of the projects that are currently in the design process (opened in the application) at regular intervals (defined in minutes in the corresponding input field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Lock projects upon opening&lt;br /&gt;
As will be referred to later in this guide, several users can work with M-Designer at the same time using a common directory for the projects. Within this context, it is strongly advisable to activate this option which prevents users from competing for access to the same project.&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as a user opens a project, it locks the write access. Other users will only be able to consult a read-only version of the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c.Create .bak files&lt;br /&gt;
When the user saves a project, this option is used to save a previous version of the project just prior to saving. The corresponding files are then given the .bak extension.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d.Select object before moving&lt;br /&gt;
As will be referred to later in this guide, all the objects positioned in the document model can be modified and moved. This option forces the user to select an object before moving it with the mouse. This prevents accidentally moving objects when selecting them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.Enable script editor&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to create, modify, or delete one's own scripts (see Script printing link).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note iSeries:&lt;br /&gt;
This option is not available if the M-Processing Server is running on iSeries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
f.Show all component’s errors&lt;br /&gt;
This option sets the number of error windows when opening a project containing components which are not or are no longer available in the project directory.&lt;br /&gt;
-	Enabled by default, a window for each unavailable component is displayed offering to find the component in question.&lt;br /&gt;
-	Disabled, the component errors are pooled and displayed in a single window.&lt;br /&gt;
-	&lt;br /&gt;
g.Force straight lines&lt;br /&gt;
This option forces the application to plot only horizontal or vertical lines (the most frequently used) by disabling the option for oblique lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
h.Temporary folder&lt;br /&gt;
This option defines the path of the temporary folder. By default, this is the folder for the installation of the application but this value can be changed if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i.List of characters to be displayed in double width&lt;br /&gt;
This input field is used to add the hexadecimal values (or ranges of values) with specific characters to be considered and displayed in double-width.&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used on the M-Designer side to display the data stream in the Spool view and for the real-time preview of the model document. The equivalent exists on the M-Processing Server side for the execution, in the configuration variable MAPCPYSPLF_DBCSPITCH_list.&lt;br /&gt;
j.Default Style&lt;br /&gt;
This list is used to select or not select a style model for defining a specified list of colours, line type, fonts, etc. for your project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k.Language&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to choose the display language of the interfaces of the application. The default language of M-designer will be the same as that of your operating system. The available languages are English, French and Japanese.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the language display of M-designer will affect the other tools in the Suite, including M-Connect, and the application will have to be restarted for any change to be registered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuring the servers===&lt;br /&gt;
The&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Servers&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; tab of the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Preferences&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; view is used to configure the paths the application must have access to:&lt;br /&gt;
*the shared directory of the sources of the M-Designer projects&lt;br /&gt;
*the directory(ies) for importing formats in the M-Processing Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shared directory of the sources contains all the projects developed by all the users of M-Designer. That folder should be a Network shared drive if more than one user develops templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note iSeries:&lt;br /&gt;
In an iSeries environment, the share folder points to the mapping path set in the MAPPING iSeries preferences (option 14 then 1 from the Mapping Main Menu on the iSeries)(see chapter 2.2.a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once developed, the M-Designer projects must be generated on the production server in the import directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are the default paths of the import directory of the M-Processing Server according to the type of platform:&lt;br /&gt;
*Unix:		➔ /apps/mapping/import/&lt;br /&gt;
*Windows:	➔ C:\Mapping\M-Processing Server\Import\&lt;br /&gt;
*iSeries:		➔ /home/mapping/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to generate the project, a connection must therefore be established between the development terminals and the production server. Two types of configuration are possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a.	Access to the server using a shared directory&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1: Name given to the configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2: Shared directory for the sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3: Access path to the import directory of the M-Processing Server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The directory for accessing the server can be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A UNC path&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:		\\test_server\Mapping\M-Processing Server\Import\ (in Windows)&lt;br /&gt;
\\Test_server \home\MAPPING\ (in iSeries)&lt;br /&gt;
*A network drive pointing to the import directory&lt;br /&gt;
Example: either a network drive &amp;quot;M: &amp;quot; pointing to the &amp;quot; ...\M-Processing Server&amp;quot; folder of the production server. The access directory will therefore contain &amp;quot;M:\Import\&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Access to the server using an FTP connection&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, an FTP (or SFTP) connection must be established between the development terminal and the production server.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1: Name given to the configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
2: Choice of the connection mode: FTP, Passive FTP, Secure FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
3: IP address of the production server.&lt;br /&gt;
4: User name for the FTP access.&lt;br /&gt;
5: Related password.&lt;br /&gt;
6: Shared directory for the sources.&lt;br /&gt;
7: Access path to the import directory of the M-Processing Server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Font===&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Police&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; tab, the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Generation of XPS&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; fonts by code page field is used to pre-load the XPS fonts by defining one or several code-pages in order to optimise the processing time during the process. The separation character used in the code-pages is &amp;quot; ; &amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
Note:&lt;br /&gt;
When importing a project, if it is written with a non-registered font, an alert indicates that the font is missing and it will appear in red in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; affected Zone&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculation options===&lt;br /&gt;
Both options present in the Calcul tab define the types of separators used for the thousands and the decimals. This information is used for recovering integer or real values in the application (by memory zones), the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;calculations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; made and the display of the results in the preview.&lt;br /&gt;
They have no effect on the generation of projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two equivalent variables exist for the execution on the M-Processing Server side: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MAPCPYSPLF_THOUSAND and MAPCPYSPLF_DECIMAL.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
These settings are used globally for the server however they can be set differently before running any Mapping commands in order to apply others separators used in others countries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Interface of the application==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General presentation===&lt;br /&gt;
When using M-Designer for the first time, only the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fixed Layout&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;design view is displayed. This simple display mode is used to subsequently activate the windows that you specifically require. &lt;br /&gt;
Window activation is presented in Chapter 3.2.a File Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following image shows an overview of the user interface of M-Designer. It is worth noting in this example that the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Spool File View, Properties, Conditions and Objects Tree windows&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; have been activated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It breaks down into several parts, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;File menu&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tabs of the Ribbon&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3:&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Groups of tools associated with each tab of the Ribbon&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Status bar with the tools for positioning and sizing the objects&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5: Navigation between the static part and the variable part of a project + display zoom tools.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the menus and tools displayed at the top of the window and the status bar located at the bottom is the Design Space where all the design work is done on the models.&lt;br /&gt;
This design space can also be made up of several views, in addition to the central Design view:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;View of the Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: of the format, of an object selected in the template.&lt;br /&gt;
7: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Spool File View&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: included here in the same display space as the Properties, which now has multiple tabs.&lt;br /&gt;
8: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Objects Tree View&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: list of all the objects present in the model (static part and variable part).&lt;br /&gt;
9: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;View of Conditions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: of the format, of a selected object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display positions in each view are entirely configurable according to the preferences and habits of each user. To do this, click (and hold) on the title of the view and then drag the mouse to the required display area or on a view that has already been positioned to obtain a display space with several views.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The related menus and toolbars===&lt;br /&gt;
This chapter only presents the different menus and their options available in M-Designer's interface. Each notion will be developed and set out in detail in the following chapters.&lt;br /&gt;
a.File menu&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to create a new project with the default properties (DEFAULT format, sequence 00010, page default size set to A4).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Component&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to create a new component with the default properties (page default size set to A4).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Variable Element&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to create a new variable element with the default properties (page default size set to A4).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to create a new Page Background (.mpw) or Dynamic (.mpi) document according to the selected view (Draw F or Map F). Overwrites the current document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to open an existing project by browsing the folder structure of files. The directory highlighted by default depends on the Server preferences for the application.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Component&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to open an existing component.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Variable Element&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to open an existing variable element.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to open an existing Page Background (.mpw) or Dynamic (.mpi) document according to the view selected (Draw F or Map F). Overwrites the current document.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Spool&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to select a spool file for loading it into the application as a data model for the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to save an existing Overlay (.mpw) or Dynamic (.mpi) document, according to the project view displayed (Draw F or Map F).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to save the current project. The source files of the project will be saved by keeping, if needed, the previous versions in accordance with the user's preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save as:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to save the current project (.mpw or .mpi) under another name.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to save the current project under another name. The source files of the project will be saved under the new name(s) entered by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Projects association:&lt;br /&gt;
*Used to link several projects in order to facilitate their generation. Linking a project produces an *.mpa settings file on the disk, in which the projects concerned and the generation options are listed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple generation:&lt;br /&gt;
*Used to select multiple M-Designer projects in order to generate them all in one go.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Import:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Designer File&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: in the static part of the current project, this is used to import another existing M-Designer page background such as a component or a static part of another project.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Designer XML&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to import into the application a complete M-Designer project which has previously been exported in XML format. This action imports the XML file as a new project, by recovering all of its properties and its design.&lt;br /&gt;
*Resources: used to import into the application an external resource to be used as the page background of a new project. The resources can either be XPS documents or AFPDS page backgrounds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Export:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Printer (PCL5)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to print the page background of the current project on a printer that has been acknowledged on the terminal.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Watermark (M-storage)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to export the page background of the current project as a layer that can be used in the M-Storage application.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Overlay (PCL5)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to select an M-Designer page background (.mpw) to be exported in PCL5 format to a disk.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Projects&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to select one or several projects to be exported to an archive (.zip) with any linked spools files.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Designer XML&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to export a current complete project in an XML description file. All of the properties and the design of the project are listed in the resulting file which can then be imported into another instance of the application on another terminal for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close:&lt;br /&gt;
*Used to close the current project or document and detect any changes that have not been saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preferences:&lt;br /&gt;
*See chapter 2.1 General.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Home Menu&lt;br /&gt;
The Home menu opens the general options for the project or document currently being designed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Clipboard:&lt;br /&gt;
Cut/copy/paste functions for one or more elements selected in the project (the standard keyboard shortcuts Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V are also available).&lt;br /&gt;
Function to reproduce the formatting from one element in others (texts or styles).&lt;br /&gt;
Function to duplicate a selected element and set the required number of horizontal and vertical occurrences (very useful for producing sheets of labels for example).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
System fonts:&lt;br /&gt;
Standard features for formatting texts: selection of the TTF system fonts (Windows) available on the user terminal, the size, the colour, the bold/underlined/italic options and the justification or alignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Generate:&lt;br /&gt;
Generation of the project in progress. This option is only available for a project currently undergoing the design process (open in the application).&lt;br /&gt;
Generation of an existing project link.&lt;br /&gt;
Function for exporting the overlay (see the File menu section).&lt;br /&gt;
Access to the script utility available in the M-Designer application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preview:&lt;br /&gt;
*Preview function of the projects currently undergoing the design process.&lt;br /&gt;
*Button for selecting and loading a spool file in the application (useful for the design of the document and for the preview).&lt;br /&gt;
*Multiple preview function for multi-sequence projects.&lt;br /&gt;
*Option to save an image of the preview.&lt;br /&gt;
*Option to load an XPS file as a layer (not included in the generation but displayed in the design like a pre-printed form).&lt;br /&gt;
*Option to unlink the source file (spool) from the template and to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c.Edit menu&lt;br /&gt;
The Edit menu opens the design options for the current project or document:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the Clipboard and System fonts sections, covered in this menu, the following tools are also provided:&lt;br /&gt;
Organize:&lt;br /&gt;
For one or more selected items in the design view, there is the option to place them above or below the others and manage the alignments and rotations. These options are also available in the pop-up menu of the object(s) selected and will be addressed in detail in the following chapters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Position according to grid:&lt;br /&gt;
As an assistance during design work, a grid may be displayed for the user in order to facilitate the positioning of the elements. Both buttons in this section can be used to adjust the spacing of the grid (size of the grid pattern and therefore precision of the positioning) and activate the snap-to-grid function when moving objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d.Display menu&lt;br /&gt;
The Display menu contains options for displaying different views of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show/Hide:&lt;br /&gt;
Given that none of these options are activated when opening the software for the first time, those functions which are most suitable for the basic use of M-Designer will be marked with the term (recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grid&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the grid in the design view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Top/Left Ruler&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the top and left hand rulers of the design view. It is possible to place guides in these rulers in order to align objects more easily. By using Left click in the ruler you place and collapse a rule-guide. Using Right click on an existing rule-guide will delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Spooled File View&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the loading view of the example spool file (or XML) (recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the properties view of the project and the elements (recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Conditions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the conditions view (recommended when the design work deals with a dynamic part).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Objects Tree&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the list of all the elements positioned in the document model with the option to access certain features related to each element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tab bar&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the tab navigation bar for the various projects open in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters List:&lt;br /&gt;
Contains a complete list of all the characters supported by the application according to a code page or a font page. Can be useful for inserting special characters in the document that cannot be entered directly using the keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refresh:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to refresh the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Window:&lt;br /&gt;
Small utility for working on different project windows which are open in the application with the option to activate one or the other but also to save or close one or more of the windows at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Shape menu====&lt;br /&gt;
This last menu contains all the drawings and composition tools for the model document. Depending on the part of the project concerned by the design, namely, either the page background part (static) or the dynamic part (variable), this menu is set out differently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Shape menu of the Overlay (or Static)=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the Clipboard and System fonts sections, which are included in this menu, the following tools are proposed for the design work of the page background:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert:&lt;br /&gt;
Add and position a zone containing static text with all the related formatting options.&lt;br /&gt;
Add and position a static image (like a company logo for example).&lt;br /&gt;
Add, set up and position a static table by defining the number of rows and columns, line styles and their formatting, row/column headers, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shapes:&lt;br /&gt;
Standard drawing palette for adding lines, curves, squares, rectangles, rounded rectangles, circles, ellipses, as well as some complex preset shapes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Styles:&lt;br /&gt;
Formatting options related to each of the preceding elements: contour style and colour, fill style and colour, line thickness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate:&lt;br /&gt;
Specific option for designing a component that can be used to generate this component.&lt;br /&gt;
=====	Shape menu of the Dynamic view=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the Clipboard and System fonts sections, which are included in this menu, the following tools are provided for the dynamic design of the document:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data:&lt;br /&gt;
This group of tools includes the utilities needed to process the data of the source file (spool). It is composed of the following two types of tools:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
GROUP:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to add, configure and position the groups of data: fixed group and variable group.&lt;br /&gt;
Also used to add anchors which are used for positioning the variable groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZONE:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to add, configure and position the data recovery zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to insert the following other dynamic elements, in addition to the data from the Spool File: straight lines, rectangles, text zones input using the keyboard, dynamic images, graphics…&lt;br /&gt;
Also used to add components and/or variable elements which have been designed elsewhere in the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Quick Access&amp;quot; toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The title bar of the application finally provides a shortcut bar, or toolbar, called Quick access:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tools and functions provided in this area are completely configurable based on the preferences of each user.&lt;br /&gt;
In order to add a function to the quick access area, simply locate the function in question in the different menus and then right-click to select Ajouter à la barre d’outils Accès rapide as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
The new function then appears in the title bar:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a function in the quick access area, simply click it using the right button and select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Supprimer de la barre d’outils Accès rapide&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The drop-down menu to the right of the quick function area is used to personalise the available functions as well as their layout (display order, add separators) using the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Personnaliser la barre d’outils Accès rapide option&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a project==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Project – Naming Conventions===&lt;br /&gt;
An M-Designer &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is the association of a layout that combines a static part of the model and a data file, referred to as the variable or dynamic part. It is identified by a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; name and a       &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sequence&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;number that makes it unique on the production server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On a PC Drive or Network share, a project is made up of three files (or five files when it deals with duplex functionality):&lt;br /&gt;
*An &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.mpw &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;file that contains the front page background (another may contain the back page background if duplex mode involved)&lt;br /&gt;
*An &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.mpi&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; file contains the formatting of data on the front (there may be another one for the back side if duplex mode involved)&lt;br /&gt;
*An &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.mpp&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;file identifies the project and creates the link between the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.mpw &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;file(s) and the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.mpi&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; file(s) and a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.pad&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; file if this one has been loaded in the GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This project concept is only worth it during the design of the model on the M-Designer side. Once generated on the production server, we then refer to it as &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;format&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;sequence&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating a project===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new project, go to the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;File&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; menu &amp;gt; &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;New&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
The view of the design then &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;displays&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; the project in the form of a white page with the default settings (portrait, A4 in simplex mode).&lt;br /&gt;
In the Display tab, it is advisable to tick Properties in the Show/Hide tab in order to display a window on the right-hand side of the screen with all the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; to be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start by entering the following two parameters (required):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Format name = identifier of the format (no more than 10 characters).&lt;br /&gt;
*Sequence number = numeric identifier of the sequence (no more than 5 characters).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The notions of Format and Sequence will be set out in greater detail in the following paragraph.&lt;br /&gt;
Other properties can be configured in this window:&lt;br /&gt;
*Description = user information (limited to 25 characters maximum).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Comment&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = additional information.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Destination&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = path for generating the project (also defined in Preferences).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Mode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = the type of data to be formatted: SPLF (text) or XML.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Code page&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = to open a non-Unicode spool file with XPS model specifying the file code page in the project properties. The option is available only SPLF mode.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Style&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = style sheet selection (also defined in Preferences). This option is detailed below.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Document and Page&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = allows you to embed data into printer language in the output stream for the following languages: PCL5, APFDS, PDF, ZPL, DPL, TEC, PGI, IPL and EPL. A zone can contain data for several different languages. When converting the XPS to the output language, the corresponding data to the output language will be used. The data is written at the beginning and end of the document.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Orientation&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = Portrait or Landscape for the front and, possibly, the back.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Page size &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;(ISO standard formats or customised format) and margins.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Selection&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of a simplex or duplex project (with long-edge or short-edge binding).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Break page &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;= default setting of the application that processes the data page by page and which activates a page break once the data of the current page has been processed. If this break is disabled, the data on the following page will be placed after the current page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Batch Breaking&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = defines a Metadata type zone which will be used to group the pages of the final document in sequences (see paragraph 8.8.a. Pagination management by batch breaking)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = if the page break is disabled, this option can be used to specify the position of the data on the next page, i.e. to the right of the current page (horizontal shift) or below (vertical shift).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SO/SI property is used in Windows and Unix to reproduce a native function under iSeries, i.e. the EBCDIC spool management containing both SBCS and DBCS characters (Asian and Japanese spools in particular). This property notifies the application about the detection mode and rendering of the Shift Out and Shift In information (non-printable 0x0F and 0x0E hexadecimal characters) that describes the DBCS texts in order to comply with the spacing between the characters regardless of their width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In detail, the Style option allows both to limit the usable fonts in a template but also to rename these fonts using an alias. It allows for example to simplify the use of resident fonts in a template renaming TTF fonts installed on the computer by the name of the resident fonts of the type of target printer.&lt;br /&gt;
The generated XPS file embeds the new name of the font defined in the style, it is possible to use these names for the definition of alternative fonts in the conversion profile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of style used for printing on Datamax printer:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;windows-1252&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;style&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;fonts&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 0&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 1&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 2&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 3&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 4&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 5&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 6&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 7 (OCR-A)&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 8 (OCR-B)&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 9 (Arial)&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/fonts&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/style&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, M-Designer v8.0.2 comes with Datamax, Eltron, PGI, Intermec, TEC, and Zebra styles allowing the old non-Unicode reuse templates.&lt;br /&gt;
The selection of these styles is automatic when opening an older template.&lt;br /&gt;
The project is now ready to be developed. It is in XPS Unicode (Single use mode) by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format / Sequence notion===&lt;br /&gt;
A Format, managed using M-Processing Server, is the equivalent of an M-Designer project although it is generated and imported on the production server. The same format can be composed of several sequences. &lt;br /&gt;
Each Sequence is conditioned to run on the different pages of a data file (spool or xml).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example that helps to understand the utility of having multiple sequences for the same project:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Namely a 3-pages invoice:&lt;br /&gt;
*The first page contains the recipient's address, the sender's address as well as the beginning of the invoice table (Page type 1)&lt;br /&gt;
*All the other pages contain the body of the invoice (Page type 2)&lt;br /&gt;
*The last page contains the invoice total (Page type 2)&lt;br /&gt;
Treating this spool with the same &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;format&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is difficult because the formatting options are different depending on the types of page. Three formats will therefore be created, one for each type of page.&lt;br /&gt;
These three formats will have the same name because they all define THE &amp;quot;Invoice&amp;quot; document template but they will have a different &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;sequence number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
*Sequence 00010 that runs on the page type 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Sequence 00020 that runs on the page type 2&lt;br /&gt;
*Sequence 00030 that runs on the page type 3&lt;br /&gt;
During the execution of the invoice format on a data file, a MERGE of these three sequences will be conducted to process the spool completely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fixed layout (Draw Tab)==&lt;br /&gt;
===Definition===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fixed layout&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; includes all the fixed and static elements of an M-Designer project. An analogy may be made with the pre-printed elements in the printing sector.&lt;br /&gt;
The design of the page background is done in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Draw F&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; section, which can be opened by clicking the corresponding tab in the right-hand section of the status bar. Selecting this tab opens the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fixed layout toolbar&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in the Shapes ribbon.&lt;br /&gt;
In case of a duplex project, the back also has its own page background that will be designed in the Draw B tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The elements of the fixed layout===&lt;br /&gt;
a.Geometric shapes&lt;br /&gt;
To draw one of these &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;shapes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, simply select the corresponding icon in the Shapes tab and then click (without releasing) the place where this element has to be positioned. Then give the element its required height and width by moving the mouse and then, finally, simply release the mouse button.&lt;br /&gt;
Once drawn, a shape can be selected and dragged, and its properties (dimensions, shape and fill) can be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
Preset of complex shapes can also be selected by clicking the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Shapes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different types of filling of shapes are available from the properties of the object:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Texts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A text box can be inserted by selecting the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Text&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon and then clicking (without releasing) on the place where this box has to be positioned. As with a geometric shape, the mouse can be used to adjust the height and the width of the area. After releasing the mouse button, simply enter the text and then set the format (selection of the font, size, color, bold, alignment/justification, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c.Images&lt;br /&gt;
Add an image by selecting the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Image&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon and then clicking (without releasing) on the place where this image has to be positioned. The required height and width can be set by moving the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After releasing the mouse button, a window appears asking you to select the Image file to be inserted. The selected image will be added to the page background of the project with the option to preserve/not preserve the proportions of the original file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d.Static Table&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
This tool can be used to insert a so-called static table because its dimensions and properties will be defined as soon as it is created by the user. &lt;br /&gt;
Add the table by selecting the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Static table&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon and then clicking (without releasing) on the place where this image has to be positioned. After releasing the mouse button, a window appears asking you to define different settings for the rows and columns such as the size, position, number, colour, titles, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
Another way to design a table, without defining its dimensions, is by using the alternative method set out in greater detail in paragraph 8.5. Draw a table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Dynamic Part (Map Tab)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Definition===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Map section of a project refers to the dynamic part of the template that depends on each stream of data processed by this model. The main elements, which can be placed in this section are, first of all, the printable information of the data files.&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Map F&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; tab (&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MAP B&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; for the back of the document) brings up the interface related to the placement of these elements. In this design view, the elements of the Draw section appear in the form of a watermark – they are greyed and can’t be selected - to facilitate the positioning of print data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Spooled File&amp;quot; notion===&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate and identify the print data, the design of an M-Designer project is based on a sample file. This sample file is the image of the production spool to be formatted.&lt;br /&gt;
Two types of data file are natively supported in M-Designer: paginated text files and &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XML files&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in the Mapping format. The configuration of the type of input file is done in the properties of the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Files processed by M-Designer can have &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.PAG&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.TXT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; extension. Historically, the text files have the .PAG extension because they are paginated. A non-paged file can be paged through the MAPPAGIFS command from M-Processing Server where an argument specifying the number of lines per page (&amp;quot;Overflow&amp;quot;) will be particularly specified.&lt;br /&gt;
The XML files must comply with a preset syntax so that they can be properly used in the application (see 6.3 XML mode: syntax and specifications).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to open and display a sample file in M-Designer, the spool view must be enabled in the Display menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To load the spool file in the application, go to the Home tab and simply click   and select the file to be loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
The Spool view then displays the data to be formatted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to assist the user in designing the project, a preview is available for viewing the result without having to print the document. To do this, simply click the Preview button in the Home menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===XML mode: syntax and specifications===&lt;br /&gt;
In XML mode, the design principles are the same and are based on a sample file loaded in the application. &lt;br /&gt;
As described in Section 4.2. Creating a project, to load an xml document, it is important not to forget to go to the project Properties and check in Parameters &amp;gt; Mode = XML.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	The &amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; tags are used to define the pages of the document. In the previous example, there is only one page.&lt;br /&gt;
•	The &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt;value1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt; tags represent unit-based information (the equivalent of zones in M-Designer).&lt;br /&gt;
•	The &amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt; tags refer to a certain number of lines containing zones, like a group in M-Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
•	The &amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;line&amp;gt; tags represent the lines inside of these groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By analogy with a paper invoice:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; represents the pages of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt; represents the boundaries of the body of the invoice (from its first line to its last line).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;line&amp;gt; describes the contents of each line of the body of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt;value1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt; can represent the following two options:&lt;br /&gt;
*If this tag is outside a group, it is a unit-based element of information in the invoice. In this case, value1 represents the invoice no. in the header for example, or the client no., the type of invoice, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
*If it is located inside the definition of a group, value1 refers to the value of the zone in the line. For example, the product code, description, price, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Specifications of the XML outline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications required by M-Designer are the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The XML header must specify the encoding of the file.&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;UTF-16&amp;quot; standalone=&amp;quot;yes&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*The root tag of the XML data must be called doc.&lt;br /&gt;
*All the tags mentioned below must have at least one attribute named name. This is the attribute that identifies the information, retrieved and formatted by the application.&lt;br /&gt;
*The names of the tags and attributes are case sensitive and must be written in lowercase letters.&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to be accessed by the application, the data must be located in the pages between the &amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; tags. A document can contain multiple pages.&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside one page, the data is then organised by unit-based field (&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag) or by groups of information (&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
*The groups of information are composed of lines (&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
*The lines contain unit-based information (&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Spool view is then called XML View and presents the contents of the file in the form of the folder structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
a.Data structure&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The XML files, which are natively supported by M-Designer, have to be compliant, using a specific syntax, like the following illustration:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Spool view is then called XML View and presents the contents of the file in the form of the folder structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; tags are used to define the pages of the document. In the previous example, there is only one page.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt;value1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt; tags represent unit-based information (the equivalent of zones in M-Designer).&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt; tags refer to a certain number of lines containing zones, like a group in M-Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;line&amp;gt; tags represent the lines inside of these groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By analogy with a paper invoice:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; represents the pages of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt; represents the boundaries of the body of the invoice (from its first line to its last line).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;line&amp;gt; describes the contents of each line of the body of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt;value1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt; can represent the following two options:&lt;br /&gt;
*If this tag is outside a group, it is a unit-based element of information in the invoice. In this case, value1 represents the invoice no. in the header for example, or the client no., the type of invoice, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
*If it is located inside the definition of a group, value1 refers to the value of the zone in the line. For example, the product code, description, price, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Specifications of the XML outline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications required by M-Designer are the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The XML header must specify the encoding of the file.&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;UTF-16&amp;quot; standalone=&amp;quot;yes&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*The root tag of the XML data must be called doc.&lt;br /&gt;
*All the tags mentioned below must have at least one attribute named name. This is the attribute that identifies the information, retrieved and formatted by the application.&lt;br /&gt;
*The names of the tags and attributes are case sensitive and must be written in lowercase letters.&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to be accessed by the application, the data must be located in the pages between the &amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; tags. A document can contain multiple pages.&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside one page, the data is then organised by unit-based field (&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag) or by groups of information (&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
*The groups of information are composed of lines (&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
*The lines contain unit-based information (&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of an XML file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c.XML View in M-Designer&lt;br /&gt;
Loading an XML sample file in M-Designer is done in the same way as for a text file. In the XML view, data appear in the form as a list of elements:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d.Page break on a XML field value&lt;br /&gt;
In the Proprieties of a group, the page break generation can now trigger on the change in XML field value.&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;groupe&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;ligne&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;id&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;data&amp;quot;&amp;gt; data &amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;ligne&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;id&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;data&amp;quot;&amp;gt; data &amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;ligne&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;id&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;data&amp;quot;&amp;gt; data &amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;ligne&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;id&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;data&amp;quot;&amp;gt; data &amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
…&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, if the used field for generating a page break is the field “id” then the page break will be generated after the execution of the second line.&lt;br /&gt;
In the interface, it exists several options for the “&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Page break&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;” parameter:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;None&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the group generate no page break.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Limit&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the group triggers a page break on a positioning limit.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XML Field&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the group triggers a page break on a XML field value change.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Limit and XML Field&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the group triggers a page break on a positioning limit and on a XML field value change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Management of the recovery of headers, when generating automatic page breaks, is possible with the options &amp;quot;Header&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Last header&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Header&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: to choose the name of the line of the XML file for as header.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Last header&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: if checked, this option allows to keep only the last header. The box is checked by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When generating a page break, the last header (or all of the above headings, if the option is unchecked) are taken at the start of the new page.&lt;br /&gt;
If the XML, two header lines follow, they are considered as a single header.&lt;br /&gt;
If a page break is triggered just after a header line, it is not printed and is carried over to the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Edit a variable list of items in a table====&lt;br /&gt;
To display a list of present items in a group in a table, it must go through the script tool.&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;rowtable function&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; allows to rearrange the lines of a group so as to obtain a horizontal distribution of elements.&lt;br /&gt;
Syntax:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;rowtotable&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;(group name, maximal number of columns);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;rowtable function&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;has two settings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Group name: contains group name to be reorganized in table, surrounded by double quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Maximal number of columns: maximal number of columns of the table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 6&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 7&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 8&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To rearrange this group as a three-column table, use the following script:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
rowtotable(&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;,3);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
This script will effectively change the group which then becomes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 6&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 7&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 8&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dynamic elements===&lt;br /&gt;
This part of the documentation presents the basic elements that can be added in the dynamic part of a project in order to get started with the main features of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A) Zone===&lt;br /&gt;
====Definition====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is the main element, which allows you to retrieve information in the input data in order to position and format them in the final graphical document.&lt;br /&gt;
In &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;text mode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, the information is identified by the following three elements of data: &lt;br /&gt;
*a row number; &lt;br /&gt;
*a column number; &lt;br /&gt;
*a length. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XML mode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, it is identified by the name of the XML field (field tag).&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can only read one row at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
In the design space, it is represented in the following two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is empty, no data is associated with it: an icon appears in the upper right corner of the latter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is associated with an &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;element&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of data, it appears without an &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;icon&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A zone is identified by its name, defined in the properties window (more details in a.2 Create a zone).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a zone====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;create &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; the zone, you have the following two options:&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the corresponding icon and its type in the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Data &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; tab and click (without releasing) the place where the element has to be positioned. This method creates an empty  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. To link the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; to an element of data of the source file, simply select the data in the Spool view (see the second method below) and drag-and-drop it in the previously created zone by holding down the Ctrl key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Immediately select the data to be recovered in the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Spool view &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and drag-and-drop it to the desired location on the design space in order to automatically create a zone linked to the selected data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the zone has been created, select it and display the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; view to enter its information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Name (of the zone): information for M-Designer's internal use to identify the different objects in the project. This field is empty when creating an empty zone and is equivalent to the value of the element of data during a zone creation using the Spool view.&lt;br /&gt;
*Text printed before/after: option to add text before and/or after the retrieved information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Identification of the position of the information in the data spool: column, length, start line.&lt;br /&gt;
Also used to extract a certain quantity of information in XML mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position in the document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to change the positioning of the zone on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Data Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to define how the M-Designer application must process the retrieved information (see a.3 Types of Zones).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Font&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to set all the formatting options for the information: font, size, color, framing, orientation, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Type of Zones====&lt;br /&gt;
The M-Designer application offers various options for processing the information according to the type of data to be processed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Text&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to print plain text&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Normal&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: exactly reproduces the values located in the positions defined by the zone whether they are letters, numbers or blanks.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Optimized&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: reproduces the characters located in these positions except for the blanks at the beginning and at the end of these positions. Consequently, the framing to the left or to the right is always observed. There is no shift due to blanks in the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Substitution&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to replace a value of the spool by another one stored in a file called replacevalue.txt. By default, this file is in its blank state in the installation folder of M-Designer. In order to carry out the substitutions, place it in the lgobitmap folder. It must contain the values to be replaced followed by replacement values separated by a tab. This sub-type is addressed in greater detail in paragraph 8.3. Replacing characters.&lt;br /&gt;
:: {{warning}} '''Attention:''' il est impératifs que le fichier replacevalue.txt ai le même encodage que le projet Onyx Designer. Par exemple, replaceValue.txt doit être unicode si le projet est unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Translate&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to substitute a value with its equivalent translated into another language. Initially, a Tools/Set Lang type zone is used to define the file which contains the translations. For each Text/Translate zone defined in the template, the program seeks for the entry that matches the value of the zone in the file that contains the translations. This should be found in the lgobitmap folder and its name must begin with “Translate_”.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Compressed&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: area displaying the recovered text into the allocated space. The text occupies the width of the zone and adjusts the font size between a maximum and a minimum so that the text is displayed completely in the allocated space. If the minimum font size does not display the full text, it is truncated and followed by &amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Truncated&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: area displaying the recovered text into the space allocated by the zone width. If the text cannot be fully displayed, it is truncated followed by &amp;quot;...&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Barcode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to encode and print barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;The list&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of available barcodes is set out in detail in chapter 8.1 Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;tools&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to insert a page number, images, … but also to display the (total) number of pages, of pages in the current batch, … &lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Page Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to number each edited page. The page number is not necessarily the same as that in the original spool. If M-Processing Server is set to exclude certain pages, the number of edited pages will not necessarily be the same as the number of pages in the original spool.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Batch Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the batch number.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Page Number (Batch)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the page number in the current batch.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Total Number of Pages&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the total number of pages in the entire document.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Total Number of Batches&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the total number of batches in the entire document.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Total Number of pages (Batch)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the total number of pages in the current batch.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Specific Replacement&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: replaces a value present in the spool processed by another value retrieved in a file. For example, you can replace the customer number that appears in the spool by the name of this customer that you retrieve in a database file.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Image&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: prints a different image based on a value of the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Export&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: this type of zone is used to retrieve an element of information from the spool and export it to a physical file.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;File Replace&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: retrieves the text stored in a file. The name of the zone must match the name of the file. This should be found in the lgobitmap folder and is called data_ZONENAME.txt (where ZONENAME is the actual name of the zone).&lt;br /&gt;
The row and length settings of the zone indicate the row and length of the text to be retrieved.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Input Text&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to create interactive input fields for designing SOAP forms in PDF or HTML format. When the user opens the form generated in Adobe Reader or an internet browser, the latter may fill in the input fields and send the data to an M-Processing Server URL, in a web entry point by clicking the SUBMIT button, given that the latter is actually a Tools/Input Text zone called SUBMIT (system name).&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;HyperLink&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: adds a URL link.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Set Lang&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to specify the file containing the translations. This should be found in the lgobitmap folder and its name must begin with “Translate_”. This particular zone cannot be printed in the final document and is not visible for visualisation or re-modelling. Although the name of this zone is not very important, it must be declared before any other M-Designer zone that requires a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
::Then, for each Text/Translate type zone defined in the template, the program will seek the entry that matches the value of the zone in the file that contains the translations.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XPS Message&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to insert an XPS file in the current page. The zone is actually a link to an XPS file present on the M-Processing Server. This file can only contain one page and is found in the lgobitmap directory (directly or in a sub-directory). It is not case sensitive.&lt;br /&gt;
If you change the XPS file, it will affect all the projects using it.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XPS File&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: By contrast with the XPS Messages, the files inserted using the XPS File type zones:&lt;br /&gt;
*** can contain several pages&lt;br /&gt;
*** are whole pages&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;create additional &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;pages in the output file&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Metadata&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to index the document for archiving (not-printed data)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Index&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: area index by default and used in XPS manipulations and in M-Storage Manager as a criterion.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapFrom&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to set the email sender.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapSend&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to define the address of the recipient.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapCopy&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to set the copy recipient.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapBCopy&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to define the recipient in hidden copy.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapNote&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to define the body of the email.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapSubject&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to define the mail subject.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapOrg&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending faxes. The value range for this area will be used to identify the sender.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapTo&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending faxes. The value shown by this area will be used to define the recipient.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapUser&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending faxes. The value range for this area will be used to identify the owner.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapFormat&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to define the document format (.BMP, .JPG, .EXE, .PAG, .PDF, .TIF, .TIF_FAX, .TXT, .XLS).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Memory&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to insert and store information (not printed) which will be recovered and used in the template. (see 8.1.b.Combined data). Different Memory zones can be designed in order to:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Text&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save alphanumeric information and delete the spaces after the text.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Text with spaces&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save alphanumeric information and keep spaces after the text.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Integer&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save integer-type digital information.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Float&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save floating-type digital information.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;SQL&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save alphanumeric information found in a database using an SQL query.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Protect SQL&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save alphanumeric information found in a database using a protected SQL query.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Math. calculation&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: use memory zones to perform a calculation.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Memory Replacement&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: retrieve information saved in the memory zone.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Memory Translate&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save alphanumeric information resulting from the automatic translation of the information retrieved in the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Graph&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to generate a graph using multiple elements of data:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graph data&lt;br /&gt;
X-axis data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Y-axis data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graph title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
X-axis title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Y-axis title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Legend data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum value of the Y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum value of the Y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No. of intervals of the Y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rounding to the nearest n of the Y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Origin of the Y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The construction of a graph is detailed in section 8.6. Construction of a graph.&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 8.0.2, M-Designer has the ability to automatically convert old graphs types in complex graphics. This feature facilitates the conversion of old projects in XPS projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Conversion&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to convert digital data according to the conversion rules (Euro to Dollar for example) defined in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Processing Server &amp;gt; M-Designer Management &amp;gt; Rates (01=E1; 02=E2; etc&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XPS PrintTicket&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: &lt;br /&gt;
Copy: number of copies to print.&lt;br /&gt;
Input Bin: input bin number (printer paper feed).&lt;br /&gt;
Output Bin: output bin number.&lt;br /&gt;
Media Type: Pre-printed, Pink, Thick …&lt;br /&gt;
Force Front Side: determines the mode Single / Duplex when printing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Commands&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: adds data in the print stream directly into printer language. As for the project properties, Document and Page (See 4.2 Creating a project), a &amp;quot;Commands&amp;quot; zone defines the printer language data for the following languages: PCL5, APFDS, PDF, ZPL, DPL, TEC, PGI, IPL and EPL. A zone can contain data for several different languages. When converting the XPS to the output language, the corresponding data to the output language will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Language&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: language selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Enable&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: enable zone for the selected language.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Pre- and Post-Printing&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the written data before and after the retrieved data from the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The writing of hexadecimal data in the &amp;quot;pre&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;post-printing&amp;quot; is possible by using the following syntax: \x followed by the hexadecimal value of two characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====A Group====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Definition=====&lt;br /&gt;
A group can be used to retrieve several rows of a spool. It is defined by a start row and an end row. In the design space, it is shown in red:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A group can be fixed (fixed start and end rows) or variable (variable start and end rows).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a fixed group====&lt;br /&gt;
To create a fixed group, you can use the same methods as when creating a zone.&lt;br /&gt;
*Create a group from the Ribbon menu, select the data in the source file and drag-and-drop them in the group previously created by holding down the Ctrl key.&lt;br /&gt;
*Immediately select the data in the Spool view and drag-and-drop it to the desired location on the design space to automatically create a group linked to the selected zone of the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the group has been created, you must enter the information in the Properties view:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Name (of the group): information for M-Designer's internal use to identify the different objects in the project. This field is empty when creating an empty group and is equivalent to the value of the first row of the selection of data during the creation of a group using the Spool view&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position in the document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to change the positioning of the group on the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Identification of the start and end rows of the block of information to be recovered&lt;br /&gt;
Offset: print position of the first row in relation to the group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Option&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusive conditions: for a row of the group, a true condition will be performed exclusively without testing the following rows&lt;br /&gt;
Table: allows zones of a group to behave like the cells of a table. Therefore, zones of the same line find themselves automatically pasted. Resize or move a zone impact size and positioning of adjacent zones. In addition, the group's lines (or conditions) are visually represented in the design window. The zones are vertically distributed according to their line. This option is detailed in paragraph 8.5.b. Draw a dynamic table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Variable&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to change the type of group: from fixed (the start and end rows are static) to variable (the&lt;br /&gt;
Given that the limits of the data selection zone are defined using the Start line and End Line fields of the group, the data must now be retrieved by creating one or more Zones inside the group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Summary&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
*The selection zone of the data block is configured by creating a Group:&lt;br /&gt;
*The data is retrieved inside this block of data by creating a Zone: &lt;br /&gt;
*We can then see that all the rows of our block of data are retrieved using the preview function (Ctrl+W). It is possible to create several Zones from the data block, place them in the group and condition their page layout (see 6.4.c. A condition).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a variable group====&lt;br /&gt;
The principle of the variable group is identical to that of the fixed group, i.e. it can be used to retrieve several rows of information in the spool. When the start and end row of the group is not always in the same place in the spool or you do not want the information to be always printed in the same place in the page, then you must use a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;variable group &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
A variable group uses a start condition and an end condition. The group begins to run when a condition is validated and it stops when another condition is validated or when it has executed a certain number of rows. A variable group can be performed once or more times in the page.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the position of the values printed by a  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;variable group &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be variable. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, you can define the settings so that the values printed by a  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;group &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;are positioned after the values printed by another  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;group &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. We refer to this as relative positioning. &lt;br /&gt;
You can also define the settings so that the invoice total is always printed one centimeter after the last row of the detail (whether there are 5 or 20 rows). The position of the invoice total will therefore change according to the number of rows of products in the invoice, for instance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A group may vary in:&lt;br /&gt;
*size: the start and end rows are dynamically set by the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;conditions &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
*print position: variable groups can be linked one after the other so that the following group is printed straight after the current group finishes.&lt;br /&gt;
These two types of variable can exist separately or jointly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a variable group, simply click the   icon and draw the group in the design space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Properties view is displayed so that the group information can be entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Name (of the group): information for M-Designer's internal use in order to identify the different objects in the project. This field is empty when creating an empty group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position in the document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to change the positioning of the group on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Offset: print position of the first row in relation to the group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Option&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusive conditions: for a row of the group, a true condition will be performed exclusively without testing the following rows&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat: if the start condition appears several times, the group will run several times provided that the end condition has been validated in the meantime&lt;br /&gt;
MapOffice: To be checked in order to design a MapOffice group (refer to the M-Connect documentation for Office document rules of design).&lt;br /&gt;
Table: allows zones of a group to behave like the cells of a table. Therefore, zones of the same line find themselves automatically pasted. Resize or move a zone impact size and positioning of adjacent zones. In addition, the group's lines (or conditions) are visually represented in the design window. The zones are vertically distributed according to their line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Variable&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to change the type of group: from fixed (the start and end rows are static) to variable (the start and end rows are variable and defined by conditions).&lt;br /&gt;
Spacing: spacing before the printing of the group.&lt;br /&gt;
Type of stop condition: used to condition the end of the execution of the variable group, with a condition or a fixed number of lines.&lt;br /&gt;
Previous group: refers to the group after which the variable group is executed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A Condition ===&lt;br /&gt;
====Execution condition====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;execution conditions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; are used to run, or not run, the object conditioned in accordance with a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;value in the spool&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
A condition can apply to a page, a component, a group, a zone, a line or a rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the condition is valid, the object is executed. Otherwise, no further action is taken. In order to complete two different actions depending on the presence of a spool value or not, you must create two objects.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Example: You want to write in black for an Invoice value and in red for a Credit note value in a spool row. You must then create a zone with a black font when it is an Invoice, and a zone that uses a red font when it is a Credit note because you cannot create the following unique condition for a particular zone: &amp;quot;black font if Invoice and red font if Credit note&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The conditions are managed differently if the object is fixed or if it belongs to a group. Indeed, in a group, the condition is named and linked to the group. Therefore, we can associate multiple objects to a single condition without having to re-enter the latter each time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Start condition====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;start condition&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; defines the first row for the execution of the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;variable group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. The group begins to run on the row where the start condition is true.&lt;br /&gt;
 M-Processing Server tests the validity of the condition from the first row of the spool (row 1). As soon as the condition is verified, the group begins to run. It stops when the end condition is verified in its turn.&lt;br /&gt;
 The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;start condition&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is used to determine if the group is to be printed at a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;fixed&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position on the page or in a relative positioning in relation to another group. It is also possible to set it so that the group is printed one centimeter after the end of another group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;start condition&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; for the group is not verified on any of the rows of the spool, the group is not executed.&lt;br /&gt;
If the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;start condition&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is verified on several rows of the spool, the group runs only once: from the first row where the condition is verified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====End condition====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The end row of a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;variable group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be defined in two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
*number of execution rows,&lt;br /&gt;
*end condition.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By knowing the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;number of rows&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; for which the variable group must run, it is possible to set the input number after you have ticked Number of lines.&lt;br /&gt;
The stop condition is not a comparison test in relation to a value present in the spool but the row number after which the group stops.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The end condition sets the last row for the execution of the variable group. The group stops running on the row where the end condition is true. Furthermore, this row can be excluded (not executed) or included (executed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c.4.	Exclusive condition&lt;br /&gt;
In a group, it is possible to manage several conditions. By default, there is only one which is the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;None&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; condition that applies for all newly created zones. That condition is always TRUE (valid).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
In a group containing product rows, there may be rows of &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;sub-totals&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. It is possible to use several zones for printing these different types of row (to display the sub-totals in bold for example) using a condition.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In this case there are basically two conditions: a Sub-total condition, which is linked to at least one zone that prints in bold and the None condition, which is linked to the zone that has standard writing for the product rows.&lt;br /&gt;
If the group operates using &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;exclusive conditions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, a single condition is applied per row, even if several are true (only the first created condition is applied). The product rows are printed as standard by the zone under the None condition and the rows of sub-totals are printed in bold by the zone under the “Sub-total” condition.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the group operates using &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;non-exclusive conditions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, all the verified conditions are applied by row. In this case, the sub-total rows are printed twice, once in bold by the zone under the Sub-total condition and once as standard by the zone under the None condition. Indeed, the None condition is always true, as mentioned previously.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Operation using &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;non-exclusive&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; conditions is very rarely used. It requires adding the reverse conditions to other conditions in the filters of a condition. In this type of operation, the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;None&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; condition is not used. It is only used to repeat the printout of an element of information, or to print the information contained on a single spool row, on two rows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The None condition cannot be deleted. If you do not want to use it, do not link it to an object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Comparison type====&lt;br /&gt;
When setting the conditions, you can test:	&lt;br /&gt;
*The existence in the row: there is in a row or in the entire page.&lt;br /&gt;
*The non-existence in the row: there is not in a row or in the entire page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Strict greater than (digital): &amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Equal to or greater than (digital): =&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Strictly less than (digital): &amp;lt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Equal to or less than (digital): =&amp;lt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The number of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
*The number of the row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tests are used by M-Designer to validate a condition or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Generate a project==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the template has been completed, all that remains to be done is to generate it for its use in M-Processing Server. &lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click the Generate the project button of the Home menu.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Save Project window opens, check that the generation path is correct. By default, the project is generated in the docpc directory of the Import folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Unix:		/apps/mapping/import/docpc/&lt;br /&gt;
*Windows:	 C:\Mapping\M-Processing Server\Import\docpc\&lt;br /&gt;
*iSeries:		 /home/mapping/docpc/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A post-generation window opens once the project has been generated to notify you of the result(s) of the generation.&lt;br /&gt;
The template is now ready to be imported in M-Processing Server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Advanced features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Barcode===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creation of a barcode====&lt;br /&gt;
To create a barcode in M-Designer, simply create a Barcode type zone and select the required barcode sub-type.&lt;br /&gt;
Note:&lt;br /&gt;
The 1D barcodes use fonts (you should download Mapping Fonts on the technical server at the http://server.mappingsuite.com). The 2D barcodes are images and do not require any font selection in M-Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====The types of barcodes=====&lt;br /&gt;
*EAN 8&lt;br /&gt;
This barcode is used to track logistics units and identify stock keeping units. The eight characters version is used for small sized packages. The data must contain seven digits. The eighth character is a check digit which is calculated by the computer.&lt;br /&gt;
*EAN 13&lt;br /&gt;
This barcode is used to track logistics units and identify stock keeping units. In an EAN 13 code, the first two characters are the identifiers of the country of origin, the other 10 are the data and the last is the check digit which is calculated by the computer. The data must contain 12 digits.&lt;br /&gt;
*Code 39&lt;br /&gt;
This barcode is used to encode alphanumeric data. It is used in almost every industry except the retail sector. The data may be of variable length and may contain letters and digits.&lt;br /&gt;
The information can be of any length and contain digits, uppercase letters and the “space”, “plus sign”, “minus sign”, “division”, “dot”, “percentage” and “dollar” characters.&lt;br /&gt;
*Code 128&lt;br /&gt;
The information to be encoded can be of any length and composed of:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optimised: digits, uppercase letters, lowercase letters, printing or non-printing ASCII characters (0 - 128), and all the function signs and characters provided by the Code 128 in the A, B and C code sets, with systematic length optimisation.&lt;br /&gt;
N/Optimised: digits, uppercase letters, lowercase letters, printing or non-printing ASCII characters (0 - 128), and all the function signs and characters provided by the Code 128 in the B code set, without length optimisation&lt;br /&gt;
Digital: digits and check character provided by the Code 128 in the C code set, with systematic length optimisation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They are used to encode general alphanumeric data and ASCII data. These barcodes are used in many industries for stock management purposes. The data is of variable length. The Code 128 C must contain an even number of characters (otherwise a zero is added at the beginning of the barcode) and may only contain digits. The Code 128 B accepts all ASCII characters, whereas the Code 128 A accepts only some of them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Code 2/5 interleaved &lt;br /&gt;
This encoding of numbers is used to enter information about the density of products, in response to precise specifications.&lt;br /&gt;
The security of this symbology is weak, except when using optional security measures (check character, messages of fixed length that are checked when scanning).&lt;br /&gt;
Although the length of the barcode is unlimited in terms of the number of characters, the principle of interleaving requires the following:&lt;br /&gt;
an even number of digits when the optional check character is not used&lt;br /&gt;
an odd number of digits when the optional check character is used&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Code 2/5 industrial&lt;br /&gt;
Digital information encoding that is designed for its ease of use&lt;br /&gt;
Development or modification of pre-existing applications&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This old symbology was frequently used in industry, particularly the automotive industry. The security of this symbology is weak, unless it is used with messages of fixed-length and checked when scanning.&lt;br /&gt;
The data must contain 1 to 32 digits.&lt;br /&gt;
*EAN128 Alpha n/optimized&lt;br /&gt;
Encoding of alphanumeric information&lt;br /&gt;
Variable length&lt;br /&gt;
Continuous bidirectional self-checking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Used for identifying dispatch units (pallets or cartons, possibly).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	EAN128 digital&lt;br /&gt;
•	Encoding of digital information&lt;br /&gt;
•	Variable length&lt;br /&gt;
•	Continuous bidirectional self-checking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Used for identifying dispatch units (pallets or cartons, possibly).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*PDF 417&lt;br /&gt;
Two-dimensional&lt;br /&gt;
Alphanumeric 2000 length&lt;br /&gt;
Eight levels of security&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Used in every sector of activity. The PDF417 code is the only two-dimensional barcode that can be scanned using a simple linear scan (1D) due to the fact that, as stacked linear symbology, it has the features of linear barcodes as well as two-dimensional ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Data Matrix&lt;br /&gt;
This code can encode up to 2335 characters. Various types of encoding are available (ASCII, C40, text and Base 256). The default mode is the automatic mode which can be used to optimise the encoding by swapping from one mode to the other depending on the data. It also has an error detection/correction system for repairing any damage.&lt;br /&gt;
*Postnet&lt;br /&gt;
The Postnet barcode is used by the United States postal service. It has been replaced by the USPS or Intelligent Mail barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
*Planet&lt;br /&gt;
The Planet barcode is used by the United States postal service. It has been replaced by the USPS or Intelligent Mail barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
*QR Code&lt;br /&gt;
It has the particular feature of being able to encode a very large number of characters (7336 in numeric mode). This type of barcode is very widespread in Japan. There are four types of encoding (alphanumeric, numeric, bytes, Kanji) for compressing the data by varying degrees depending on the type of data. By default, an automatic mode is used to choose the encoding method that will give the best compression rate (switch of mode while processing). Error detection/correction codes are added to the data, which are used to prevent the loss of data in the event of damage. There are four levels of error detection/correction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*MaxiCode&lt;br /&gt;
The MaxiCode barcodes, developed by UPS - United Parcel Service, are defined by the ISO 16023-2000 standard. Unlike the others, it has a set size, which limits the number of characters to be encoded. Indeed, the maximum number of characters is 93 alphanumeric characters or 138 numeric characters. There are two types of encoding. The first only encodes a string of characters containing data according to a conventional type of encoding and a standard type of error detection/correction. The second type encodes the following three fields in addition to the string of data: the country which is encoded using 3 digits according to the ISO 3166 standard, the postal code which is encoded using 6 characters and finally a type of service using 3 digits. These three fields are encoded using an extended error correction mode contrary to the string of data whose correction mode is standard.&lt;br /&gt;
*Japan Postal&lt;br /&gt;
The Japan Postal barcode is used by the Japanese postal service.&lt;br /&gt;
*Codabar (NW7)&lt;br /&gt;
In Japan, the Codabar Monarch is also called NW-7. The relatively simple composition of the Codabar Monarch means that it is frequently used to encode serial numbers for applications involving blood bank transfusion services, home deliveries, libraries, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
*USPS&lt;br /&gt;
USPS = United States Postal Service. The more commonly used official name is the Intelligent Mail Barcode. It is the new American postal barcode, which is to replace the Planet and the Postnet. The Intelligent Mail barcode is a 4-state barcode composed of 65 bars.&lt;br /&gt;
*UPC-A&lt;br /&gt;
The UPC-A barcode is a U.S. equivalent of the EAN13 barcode, the first digit of which is 0. It is used primarily to identify products in store. The UPC-A barcode can encode 11 digits, a number system, five digits for the Manufacturing Code and five digits for the product code. A 12th digit is calculated using the first eleven in order to act as a check digit. Font used: BCUPCA.ttf&lt;br /&gt;
*UPC-E&lt;br /&gt;
The UPC-E barcode is a short version of the UPC-A barcode, in which the ten digits of the UPC-A barcode (manufacturing and product code) are reduced to six digits by removing superfluous zeros. With the Number System and the check digit, a UPC-E barcode is therefore composed of eight digits. M-Designer can be used to include UPC-A (11 digits) barcodes in the UPC-E format as well as a code reduced to 6, 7 or 8 digits. Font used: BCUPCE.ttf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*MSI&lt;br /&gt;
The MSI barcode is used primarily for stock management, marking storage containers and shelving in warehouse environments. An MSI barcode uses one or two check keys calculated using the Modulo 10 or Modulo 11 methods and is used to encode numeric values of indefinite size. M-Designer can encode using either a Modulo 10 check key, a Modulo 11 check key, two Modulo 10 check keys, or even a Modulo 11 check key followed by a Modulo 10 check key. Font used: BCMSI.ttf without label and with label: BCMSIL.ttf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====The size of the barcode=====&lt;br /&gt;
The size of the barcode can be defined in the following two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
*The first involves choosing the Fit the area option in the Properties view, in which case the barcode will be adjust as well as possible to the size of the zone, according to its standard.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the Fit the area option is unticked, the size of the barcode can be set by the size of the font of the zone. This size affects the width and the height of the code. The height can be reduced by reducing the percentage of the height setting of the zone.&lt;br /&gt;
Comment:&lt;br /&gt;
In order to label a barcode, simply select a labelled font.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Combined data====&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to combine data found in different places in the spool within a single barcode. In order to achieve this, it is necessary to create as many memory zones as there are elements of data to be retrieved from the spool and then all these zones must be combined in the label of the barcode zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Map F  tab:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Properties view:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In this example, the Memory zone have the values:&lt;br /&gt;
*MEM_FACT : 0012601&lt;br /&gt;
*MEM_DTFACT : 14/10/99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 It is also possible to add text that is not found in the spool using the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Memory&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; zones (detailed in paragraph 6.4.a.3 Type of zones): [[MEM1]]TEXT[[MEM2]].&lt;br /&gt;
If you use replacement zones in a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Barcode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; zone, &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;the Length of the barcode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; zone must be equal to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
====Special case: EAN128====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The encoding of the EAN128 is identical to the encoding of the Code128. That is why we use the same fonts. The difference is that the EAN128 is structured in order to standardize the information that it contains. To achieve this, an AI (Application Identify) is inserted between each piece of information, which is used to identify the data encoded. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Structure of the EAN128: START FNC1 AI DATA (FNC1) AI DATA .... (FNC1) AI DATA CRC END &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FNC1: Separator character of the EAN128. &lt;br /&gt;
AI: Application Identifier, is used to encode several standardized elements of information in one code (date+time+etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first FNC1 is automatically added by M-Designer. It is required as it is used to differentiate an EAN128 barcode from a CODE128 barcode. &lt;br /&gt;
However, the following FNC1 are optional. Indeed, they are only required when the previous element of data does not have a fixed length, in which case they are used to separate each element of data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to insert the FNC1 character, you have to put the paragraph (§) character in your spool. This character will automatically be replaced by FCN1 characters by the M-Processing Server. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: SPOOL ----&amp;gt; MAPPING &lt;br /&gt;
AI DATA ----&amp;gt; START FNC1 AI DATA CRC END &lt;br /&gt;
AI DATA § AI DATA ----&amp;gt; START FNC1 AI DATA FNC1 AI DATA CRC END &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you cannot change your spool to add the &amp;quot;§&amp;quot; character or if you want to combine several elements of data that are located in different places in the spool (see previous paragraph: 8.1.b. Combined data), you can use the memory zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note:&lt;br /&gt;
The AIs of the EAN128 barcode label must be in brackets. This is not managed by the barcode fonts, so you have to create a text zone under the barcode in order to add the label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special case: code 128====&lt;br /&gt;
There are three encoding modes for 128 barcodes: &lt;br /&gt;
A mode (alphanumeric) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
B mode (alphanumeric). The code 128 Alphanumeric encodes in B mode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
C mode (numeric). The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;code 128 Alphanumeric&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; encodes in C mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;code 128 Alphanumeric&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Optimized switches from B mode to C mode automatically in order to optimize the size of the barcode. &lt;br /&gt;
However, your barcode may have to comply with a specific type of formatting, i.e. a certain number of characters in A, B or C mode. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, the barcode that corresponds to the mail tracking ID of &amp;quot;La Poste&amp;quot; contains 13 characters. The first three must be encoded in B mode and the last ten in C mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to create this &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;barcode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; using M-Designer, you must create a &amp;quot;Code 128 N/Optimized&amp;quot; type zone and then enter a formatting screen in the Advanced options of this zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
For the following data: 1J45034500751 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You want to encode: &lt;br /&gt;
*the first three characters (1J4) in B Mode &lt;br /&gt;
*the last ten characters (5034500751) in C mode &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your formatting mask must therefore be BBBCCCCC. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will notice that although there are ten digits to be encoded in C mode, there are only five 'C's in the formatting mask. This is due to the fact that one character in C mode encodes two digits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special case: Codabar====&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create documents containing Codabar type barcodes (also known by the name of NW-7 in Japan).&lt;br /&gt;
Given that this type of barcode does not require encoding or check characters, there is no &amp;quot;CODABAR&amp;quot; type zone in M-Designer. In this case, simply create a text zone that uses the BCCodabar or BCCodabarL font.&lt;br /&gt;
However, this type of barcode must begin with a start character and an end character (character A, B, C or D). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the start and end characters are not present in your data, you will need to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1)Create a memory zone to contain the data of the barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
2)Create a memory replacement type zone to contain the element of data plus the start and end character. This zone must use the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;BCCodabar or BCCodabarL&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; font.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special case: 2D Barcode====&lt;br /&gt;
Currently, MAPPING manages four types of 2D barcode: PDF417, DATA MATRIX, QR CODE and MAXICODE. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In PCL5 and PDF: PDF417 - DATA MATRIX - QR CODE - MAXICODE &lt;br /&gt;
In ZEBRA: PDF417 - DATA MATRIX &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These barcodes do not require the selection of any special fonts. &lt;br /&gt;
In PCL5 and PDF, the &amp;quot;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Barcode width&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot; setting is used to change the size of the barcode. &lt;br /&gt;
In ZEBRA, the selected font size is used to change the size of the barcode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The benefit of 2D barcodes is being able to encode a number of important pieces of information. If the data that you need to encode is located in different places in the spool, go to paragraph 8.1.b. Combined data in order to combine them in a single barcode. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note that this type of barcode manages optimizations (switching from alphanumeric to numeric) and the size of the barcodes may therefore vary in height and width depending on the content to be encoded.&lt;br /&gt;
=====QR code=====&lt;br /&gt;
The QR CODE barcode was developed according to the International ISO/IEC 18004 standard. It has the particular feature of being able to encode a very large number of characters (7336 in numeric mode). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of barcode is very widespread in Japan. It is already used in industry, but has also been adopted by the general public since mobile phones have been able decode it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are four types of encoding (alphanumeric, numeric, bytes, Kanji) for compressing the data by varying degrees depending on the type of data. By default, the automatic mode is used to choose the encoding method that will give the best compression rate (switch of mode while processing). For example, let us assume that the beginning of the string contains alphanumeric type data. As soon as the program detects a string of at least 13 numeric characters, it changes encoding mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error detection/correction codes are added to the data. These codes prevent losing data through damage. There are four levels of error detection/correction. By default, level three is used, whose codes use approximately 25% of the final barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available advanced options: &lt;br /&gt;
Barcode width: Value between 1 and 15 specifying the size of the barcode &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error Level: (7%, 15%, 25% and 30%) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCN1:&lt;br /&gt;
*ECI protocol not implemented&lt;br /&gt;
*ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first position&lt;br /&gt;
*ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in second position In the last case, a separator character (Application identifier) must be specified. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Application Identifier: Separator character, used only with the implicit FCN1 in second position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Type of encoding:&lt;br /&gt;
AUTO: Automatic encoding of the data with a mode change depending on the data&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ALPHA: Alphanumeric encoding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NUMERIC: Numeric encoding &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BYTE: Encoding in bytes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====DATAMATRIX=====&lt;br /&gt;
The Datamatrix barcode is defined by the International ISO/IEC 16022 (ECC200) standard. This code can encode up to 2335 characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Various types of encoding are available (ASCII, C40, text and Base 256) and the default mode is the automatic mode that can be used to optimize the encoding by swapping from one mode to the other depending on the data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It also has an error detection/correction system for repairing any damage.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Advanced options: &lt;br /&gt;
*Barcode width: Value between 1 and 15 specifying the size of the barcode &lt;br /&gt;
*Type of encoding: &lt;br /&gt;
AUTO: Automatic encoding of the data with a mode change depending on the data&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oASCII: The ASCII encoding is a tacit plan for encoding the ASCII data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
C40: C40 encoding transforms 3 alphanumeric characters into two code words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TEXT: The Text encoding is used to encode the lowercase characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====PDF 417=====&lt;br /&gt;
The PDF 417 is defined by the International ISO/IEC 15438 standard. This type of barcode can encode up to 2700 numeric characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three types of data encoding (alphanumeric, numeric and bytes). The automatic mode chooses the best compression rate and changes the mode while encoding. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are also eight levels of error detection/correction mode. In automatic mode, the level is chosen according to the number of characters to be encoded.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Advanced options: &lt;br /&gt;
Barcode width: Value between 1 and 15 specifying the size of the barcode &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error Level: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*AUTO: automatic choice. &lt;br /&gt;
*0 - 8 &lt;br /&gt;
Compact mode: Activation of the compact mode or not. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ratio: Used to determine the height/width ratio of the barcode &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fixed columns: Used to define the number of columns. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fixed rows: Used to define the number of rows. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selection of a ratio prevents you from specifying the number of rows and columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====UPS MAXICODE=====&lt;br /&gt;
This type of barcode, developed by UPS - United Parcel Service, is defined by the ISO 16023-2000 standard. Unlike the others, it has a set size, which limits the number of characters to be encoded. Indeed, the maximum number of characters is 93 alphanumeric characters or 138 numeric characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of encoding: &lt;br /&gt;
*The first only encodes a string of characters containing data according to a conventional type of encoding and a standard type of error detection/correction. &lt;br /&gt;
*The second type encodes three other fields stored in three of M-Designer's memory spaces, in addition to the string of data. These fields are: the country encoded using 3 digits in accordance with the ISO 3166 standard (called MAP_countr), the postal code encoded using 6 characters (MAP_zipcod) and finally a type of service using 3 digits (MAP_servic). These three fields are encoded using an extended error correction mode contrary to the string of data whose correction mode is standard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available advanced options: &lt;br /&gt;
•	Barcode width: Value between 1 and 15 specifying the size of the barcode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Automating===&lt;br /&gt;
The automating of M-Designer allows you to create image files corresponding to the preview of a project as well as generate a project or an association of projects. All this can be done from the command line, in hidden or non-hidden mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea is to build the command with a .BAT file or a remote command, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;InFile&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: .PAG or .XML file to be modelled&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;OutFile&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Output image file&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ProjectFile&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Project to be opened (.MPP)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ProjectAsso&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Project association to be generated (.MPA)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MPIFile&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: .MPI file to be opened (MAP tab)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MPWFile&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: .MPW file to be opened (DRAW tab)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Hide&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: To launch M-Designer in hidden mode&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Colour&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Use of color or not to create the image&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rotation&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Rotation angle of the image (default: 0)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Resolution&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Image resolution (default: 300)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Specimen&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Adding a text above the image (text to be specified in the argument)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Mode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Choose SPOOL or XML mode (default: SPOOL)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Generate&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: To start generating the project indicated in the argument&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lang&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Generation language (default: PCL5) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*0: PCL5&lt;br /&gt;
*1: PCL5 OPTIMISED&lt;br /&gt;
*2: PCL5 IMAGE&lt;br /&gt;
*3: AFPDS&lt;br /&gt;
*4: PDF (Projects must be associated for generating in PDF)&lt;br /&gt;
*5: ZEBRA&lt;br /&gt;
*6: DPL&lt;br /&gt;
*7: IGP&lt;br /&gt;
*8: TEC&lt;br /&gt;
*9: IPL&lt;br /&gt;
*10: F+D&lt;br /&gt;
*11: EPL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SubLang: Generation sub-language (default: 0). Depends on the generation language&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*PCL5, PCL5 OPTIMISED, PCL5 IMAGE:&lt;br /&gt;
*0 = PCL5e (default)&lt;br /&gt;
*1 = PCL5&lt;br /&gt;
*AFPDS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0 = 4028 Compatible&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 = Resident Font&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 = Font Collection (default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*DPL:&lt;br /&gt;
0 = Macro Standard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 = Send Standard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 = Macro Mainframe (default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 = Send Mainframe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*IPL:&lt;br /&gt;
0 = Bitmap Font&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 = True Type Font (default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;GenColour&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Color generation (= 1) or black and white (= 0) (default: 0)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Active&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Active mode, only for AFPDS language (0 or 1) (default: 0)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Res&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Resolution of the generation. Depends on the language of generation:&lt;br /&gt;
PCL5, PCL5 OPTIMISED, PCL5 IMAGE: 300 or 600 (default: 300)&lt;br /&gt;
AFPDS: 240, 300 or 600 (default: 240)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PDF: 300 or 600 (default: 300)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZEBRA: 152, 203, 300 or 600 (default: 152)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DPL: 152, 203, 300 or 600 (default: 152)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IGP: 72, 152, 203, 300 or 600 (default: 72)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TEC: 203 or 300 (default: 203)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPL: 203 or 300 (default: 203)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
F+D: 203 or 300 (default: 203)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EPL: 203 or 300 (default: 203)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Overlay&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Generate page background (0 or 1) (default: 1)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Font&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Generate font (0 or 1) (default: 1)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FtpUse&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: 0 = does not use FTP; 1 = uses FTP&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FtpFolder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: FTP directory&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FtpLogin&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: FTP login&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FtpPassword&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: FTP password&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FtpIPAddress&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: IP address of the server&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ShareFolder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Share directory&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ServerName&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Name of the server (description)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rename&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: changes the FORMAT and SEQUENCE of the project using its name. Example: Facture00010.mpp&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MVM&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Opens M-Designer in MappingVersionManager mode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example 1: Project generated in PCL, in color and 300 dpi&lt;br /&gt;
C:\Mapping\M-Designer\M-Designer.exe &amp;quot;-Hide&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-ProjectFile:C:\Mapping\M-Processing_Server \Import\docpc\test.mpp&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Generate&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Lang:0&amp;quot; &amp;quot;- GenColor:1&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Res:300&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the &amp;quot;-Generate&amp;quot; setting (indicating a project generation), the &amp;quot;-ProjectFile: &amp;quot; or &amp;quot;-ProjectAsso: &amp;quot; setting must be present in order to identify the project to be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
If the &amp;quot;-ProjectFile: &amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-ProjectAsso: &amp;quot; settings are present, the project will take priority for the generation and the association of projects will be ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example 2: creating a colour BMP image, with a 90° rotation, in 203 dpi and with the word SPECIMEN overlaid&lt;br /&gt;
C:\Mapping\M-Designer\M-Designer.exe &amp;quot;-InFile:c:\test.xml&amp;quot; &amp;quot;- OutFile:c:\image.bmp&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-ProjectFile:C:\ Mapping\M-Processing_Server \Import\docpc\test.mpp&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Hide&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Rotation:90&amp;quot; &amp;quot;- Resolution:203&amp;quot; “-Color” &amp;quot;-Mode:XML&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Specimen:SPECIMEN&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to create an image, the &amp;quot;-InFile &amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-ProjectFile&amp;quot; settings are mandatory. &lt;br /&gt;
If &amp;quot;-Outfile&amp;quot; is absent, the output file takes the name of the input file with the extension .BMP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default mode is SPOOL. If the input file is an XML file, you have two specify the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Replacing characters===&lt;br /&gt;
The objective is to explain how to replace a string of characters in the input file by another string of characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The operating principle involves using a text file as a conversion chart between the value to be replaced and the new value. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is required in order to use the conversion chart:&lt;br /&gt;
*Define the zone using the Type mode = Text / Sub-type mode = Substitution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finish and generate the template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ReplaceValue.txt&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; file in a text editor (like Notepad, but not Word). The syntax of the file is as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
Value to be replaced	Tab 	 New Value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, the &amp;quot;]&amp;quot; character will be replaced by the &amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot; character and &amp;quot;Nom&amp;quot; will be replaced by &amp;quot;Name&amp;quot; (if the value to be replaced is located in a Text\Substitution type zone).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save the ReplaceValue.txt file in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;lgobitmap&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; sub-directory of Mapping (\home\mapping\lgobitmap by default on iSeries and /apps/mapping/import/lgobitmap on Unix)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Generate a template in PDF (by association of projects)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This method by &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Association of projects&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is required to generate a template in PDF language but it can also be used for all the other languages supported by M-Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To create an association of projects, simply click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;File &amp;gt; Association of projects &amp;gt; New &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A window to select the projects concerned opens:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
You must select the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.MPP&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; files that you want to associate.&lt;br /&gt;
Then click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button to save your project association. The file will have the .MPA extension.&lt;br /&gt;
Once the file has been saved, click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Generate&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The generation by association of projects is complete. All that remains is to import your templates to your production system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Draw a table===&lt;br /&gt;
====Static table====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to create a perfectly drawn and aligned table without using the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Static Table&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; tool of the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fixed layout &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; view, you need to complete the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
start by drawing the rectangular outline of the table,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
draw the vertical lines to define the columns,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
draw the horizontal lines needed to create any rows you may require (column headers for example),&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
finally select all the elements of the table and press the lowercase &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; key on the keyboard:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Comment:&lt;br /&gt;
This design aid can be used in the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fixed layout &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; view and  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Dynamic layout &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; view of the project. In the Dynamic view, you can draw a table inside a Group and place, for example, an execution condition on a horizontal line to dynamically draw a line for each new row of data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Dynamic table====&lt;br /&gt;
As announced in the options available for a group (see paragraph 6.4.b.2. Create a fixed group), the table mode allows to zones of a group to act as the table cells. The zones of the same line therefore find themselves automatically pasted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remark:&lt;br /&gt;
Resize or move a zone has an impact on the adjacent zones size and positioning.&lt;br /&gt;
The group's lines (or conditions) are visually represented in the design window. The zones are, on the other hand, vertically distributed according to their line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Construction of a graph===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Map part:&lt;br /&gt;
Create a graph from the tab Graph:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name it (here “GRAPH1”):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
From there, the complex graph can be constructed in two different ways, presented below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====By selecting zones one by one====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select, in the spool, the zones that will be used in the graph,&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, for each defined zone:&lt;br /&gt;
*Name them all with the same name as the graph (here it will be “GRAPH1”)&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter the Type = “GRAPH”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the utility of the area in the graph, select the corresponding &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sub-type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in the proposed list:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to the Graph &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;click Edition&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *Set your chart by choosing from the tabs:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the graphic: which will be included in the names of the zones,&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Number of zones&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: that will compose the chart,&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Graph type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Pie, Bar, Line chart&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NB: For the graph type = &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Bar chart&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, it is possible to define the spacing between the bars on the right and on the left (in%). This option can be used, for example, to overlay two graphs by playing on the bar spacing of each graph.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: allows to choose the fill, the border, the width of the outline, the fill type, ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Positioning&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: allows to place the titles (X, Y, of the graph) and the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;legend&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; , to resize the graph according to the preferences of the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NB: The print area of the graph is the area delimited by the large rectangle so everything that will not be in it will not be visible when printing (e.g.: the &amp;quot;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Legend&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot; area is outside the rectangle in the first image below while it is in in the second).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-	The Legend is constructed by selecting the zones in the spool that will serve as legend for the chosen attributes. As with any other data, you must name the field as the name of the graph and enter the properties of the field with Type = &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; and Sub-type = &amp;quot;Data of the legend&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NB: Be attentive to respect the order of the data selection by defining the zones that will serve to the legend because they will follow the same order as the one of the attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====By creating a group====&lt;br /&gt;
The principle is the same as that described above except that the data is grouped into a group. This option is possible if the data of the chart follow in the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a group that will define the data to be taken into account for the construction of the graph and to deposit the selected zones that contain data, titles, legend …&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name the zone(s) with the same name as the graph and enter its properties with Type = “Graph” and the Sub-type according to the role of the zone (title, data, legend …).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The remainder of the construction of the graph is the same as that described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculation in a group===&lt;br /&gt;
To simplify the calculation management into a group and especially the management of “total” and “subtotal”, a tool has been integrated within M-Designer. It allows to perform processing on an input XML file using scripts. These scripts are executed before the application of the template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding of the calculation into a group through this tool is by the “addline” script function. The addline function adds a line to a group specifying a sequence of pairs “field name / value” to add. &lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the “string” type parameters must be surrounded by double quotes and field names in formulas by single quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Syntax:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
addline(group name, line name, page break type line, name of the first field, value of the first field, pre-calculation of the first field, name of the second field, value of the second field, pre-calculation of the second field, etc…);&lt;br /&gt;
The addline function starts by the following arguments:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Group name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: contains group name where the line should be added.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Line name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: line name to add.&lt;br /&gt;
Then, it consists of an unlimited sequence of field / value pairs:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Field name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: field name that has the line&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Field value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: field value possessed by the line&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Yes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: The calculation is resolved during the script execution, taking into account all the XML values. &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;No&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: The calculation is solved when using the value in a template and therefore takes into account only the values in the current page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the following script adds a line to the group named “group”:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
addline(&amp;quot;group&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;line&amp;quot;,yes,&amp;quot;field1&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;value1&amp;quot;,no,&amp;quot;field2&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;value2&amp;quot;,no);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;groupe&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
…&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;ligne&amp;quot; pagebreak=”1”&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;champ1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;valeur1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;champ2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;valeur2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the field value contains a calculation then the syntax is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SUM(operation)]] for calculating a sum over all the groups of lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[AVG(operation)]] for calculating an average over all the groups of lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, “operation” is a mathematical calculation using field names in lines of the group. Field names must be surrounded by single quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5.5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For adding a total line of this group, use this script:&lt;br /&gt;
 addline(&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;LigneTotal&amp;quot;,no &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;total&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;total = [[SUM('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;quot;, yes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;moyenne&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;moyenne = [[AVG('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;quot;, yes&lt;br /&gt;
); &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This script adds a total line at the end of the group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
…&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5.5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;LigneTotal&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;total&amp;quot;&amp;gt;total = 99.5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;moyenne&amp;quot;&amp;gt;moyenne = 24.875&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Pre-calculation option to “no” allows to not execute calculations when adding the line to the group but when executed by the template. &lt;br /&gt;
The advantage of this option is to perform calculations only with the written data on the current page, thus allowing the writing of subtotals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a subtotal line to the previous group, use this script:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
addline(&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;LineSubtotal&amp;quot;,yes,&amp;quot;subtotal&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;sous-total = [[SUM('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;quot;,no);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This script adds a total line at the end of the group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
…&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5.5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;LineSubtotal&amp;quot; pagebreak=”1”&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;subtotal&amp;quot;&amp;gt;sous-total = [[SUM('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;c&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pagination management===&lt;br /&gt;
Information writing management of the pagination such as the total number of page, the number of the batch and the number of pages in the batch is possible in M-Designer through the following two options:&lt;br /&gt;
====Batch breaking====&lt;br /&gt;
The “Batch breaking” option is in the Properties of the template (see paragraph 4.2.Creating a project). It defines a Metadata type zone which will be used to group the pages of the final document in batch.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
During page processing:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If the Metadata type zone retrieves a new value then a new batch will be created. The current page will belong to this new batch.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the Metadata type zone retrieves a value already previously recovered, the current page will be moved to the batch corresponding to that value.&lt;br /&gt;
*If no value is recovered by the Metadata type zone, the page remains in the same batch as the previous page.&lt;br /&gt;
The multi-document system of XPS is used to represent the batch, the output file is sorted by sequence (first pages of the first batch and the second pages, etc ...).&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacement variables====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable information writing of pagination, there are “post-treatment” type variables, that is to say they will be replaced by their real value at the printing time.&lt;br /&gt;
These variables can be used into zones or in text blocks:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MAP_TOTAL_PAGE&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = total number of page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MAP_TOTAL_DOC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = total number of batch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MAP_TOTAL_PAGE_IN_DOC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = page number in the current batch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The used syntax is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;PST&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: variable name; default value]]&lt;br /&gt;
The “default value” is mandatory and allows to having a text in the page. This temporary text will be replaced by its real value. It is important because it is through this text that the positioning calculations will be. This text must therefore have a number of character at least equal to the maximum value expected by the used variable.&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
[[PST:MAP_TOTAL_PAGE;000]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays “000” in the page, but at the printing time this value will be replaced by:&lt;br /&gt;
-	&amp;quot;  5&amp;quot; if there are 5 page in total.&lt;br /&gt;
-	&amp;quot; 10&amp;quot; if there are 10 page in total.&lt;br /&gt;
-	&amp;quot;150&amp;quot; if there are 150 page in total.&lt;br /&gt;
Others syntaxes also exist, accessible during the processing of the page:&lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;VAR:MAP_CURRENT_PAGE&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;]] = current page number &lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;VAR:MAP_CURRENT_DOC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;]] = current batch number (the Metadata zone managing the batch breaking must be defined before using this variable). &lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;VAR:MAP_CURRENT_PAGE_IN_DOC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;]] = current page number in the current batch.&lt;br /&gt;
And in general:&lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;VAR:variable d’env&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;]] = retrieve the contents of the environment variable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Widows-and-orphans management===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Complex management of widows and orphans is possible through two features: the Entire group and the repetition of XML group.&lt;br /&gt;
====Entire group====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When we use a limit type of page break generation, a new option appears in the group properties: Entire group. This option specifies that the group cannot be cut and it must be printed in full on a single page. If the limit triggers a page break, no line of the group will be printed, the group will be fully processed on the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====XML group repetition====&lt;br /&gt;
The XML group repetition assumes that the group appears several times in the input XML file. This feature is enabled with the parameter &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; in the group properties.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
In the example below, the group &amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot; appears three times in the XML. By default, the group of the template will retrieve the information from the first appearance of the group in the XML. But if the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; option is checked, the execution of the group will continue on all occurrences.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Description item 1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Description item 2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Description item 3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The cumulative use of a boundary generating page breaks with the &amp;quot;Entire group&amp;quot; and active repetition allows to manage a complex system of widows and orphans.&lt;br /&gt;
In our example, the lines &amp;quot;item&amp;quot; and the lines &amp;quot;description&amp;quot; cannot be separated by a page break.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=M-Designer_8.0_Technical_Reference_Guide&amp;diff=30778</id>
		<title>M-Designer 8.0 Technical Reference Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=M-Designer_8.0_Technical_Reference_Guide&amp;diff=30778"/>
		<updated>2020-03-17T11:12:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : /* Type of Zones */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
===Objectives===&lt;br /&gt;
This document is the reference guide for the configuration and use of the M-Designer application, one of the modules of the Mapping Suite. We will introduce you to all the features of the application in this document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Guide applies to the M-designer software (version 8 and higher).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Presentation of M-Designer===&lt;br /&gt;
M-Designer is the design and graphic composition module for documents. It is used to transform simple files of static data into high-quality graphic documents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software runs on Windows computers and has a user interface divided in two parts. The first part is a drawing type view for creating the page backgrounds (similar to pre-printed forms for printing) and the second is a dynamic view for retrieving, editing and presenting data.&lt;br /&gt;
Whether it is directly from a spool or reformatted using the M-Connect software, the data comes from raw files (AS/400 spool type) and data extractions from databases or from ERP and are presented &amp;quot;flat&amp;quot; (text format) or in XML format (compatible with M-designer – see 6.3.XML mode: syntax and specifications).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The design of the model (document template) is performed on the user terminal that is hosting the application with a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;preview&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; mode for validating the modifications as soon as they are made. During the design process, the document model is called an &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Designer project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
The template is then generated and imported on the M-Processing Server (iSeries, Unix/Linux or Windows) to be used in production. We call this an &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Designer Format&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation===&lt;br /&gt;
The install, update and uninstall procedures are set out in detail in the M-designer Installation and Update Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring M-Designer==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After installing M-Designer, the first key step is to configure the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Preferences&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; (see 1) of the application. These can be opened in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;File&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; menu (see 2). These preferences are local to the current user and they are stored in the terminal's registry base under &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Mapping.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General===&lt;br /&gt;
The first tab of the Preferences window presents the general options of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a.Automatic save&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to force an automatic backup of the projects that are currently in the design process (opened in the application) at regular intervals (defined in minutes in the corresponding input field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Lock projects upon opening&lt;br /&gt;
As will be referred to later in this guide, several users can work with M-Designer at the same time using a common directory for the projects. Within this context, it is strongly advisable to activate this option which prevents users from competing for access to the same project.&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as a user opens a project, it locks the write access. Other users will only be able to consult a read-only version of the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c.Create .bak files&lt;br /&gt;
When the user saves a project, this option is used to save a previous version of the project just prior to saving. The corresponding files are then given the .bak extension.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d.Select object before moving&lt;br /&gt;
As will be referred to later in this guide, all the objects positioned in the document model can be modified and moved. This option forces the user to select an object before moving it with the mouse. This prevents accidentally moving objects when selecting them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.Enable script editor&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to create, modify, or delete one's own scripts (see Script printing link).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note iSeries:&lt;br /&gt;
This option is not available if the M-Processing Server is running on iSeries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
f.Show all component’s errors&lt;br /&gt;
This option sets the number of error windows when opening a project containing components which are not or are no longer available in the project directory.&lt;br /&gt;
-	Enabled by default, a window for each unavailable component is displayed offering to find the component in question.&lt;br /&gt;
-	Disabled, the component errors are pooled and displayed in a single window.&lt;br /&gt;
-	&lt;br /&gt;
g.Force straight lines&lt;br /&gt;
This option forces the application to plot only horizontal or vertical lines (the most frequently used) by disabling the option for oblique lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
h.Temporary folder&lt;br /&gt;
This option defines the path of the temporary folder. By default, this is the folder for the installation of the application but this value can be changed if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i.List of characters to be displayed in double width&lt;br /&gt;
This input field is used to add the hexadecimal values (or ranges of values) with specific characters to be considered and displayed in double-width.&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used on the M-Designer side to display the data stream in the Spool view and for the real-time preview of the model document. The equivalent exists on the M-Processing Server side for the execution, in the configuration variable MAPCPYSPLF_DBCSPITCH_list.&lt;br /&gt;
j.Default Style&lt;br /&gt;
This list is used to select or not select a style model for defining a specified list of colours, line type, fonts, etc. for your project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
k.Language&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to choose the display language of the interfaces of the application. The default language of M-designer will be the same as that of your operating system. The available languages are English, French and Japanese.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing the language display of M-designer will affect the other tools in the Suite, including M-Connect, and the application will have to be restarted for any change to be registered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configuring the servers===&lt;br /&gt;
The&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Servers&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; tab of the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Preferences&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; view is used to configure the paths the application must have access to:&lt;br /&gt;
*the shared directory of the sources of the M-Designer projects&lt;br /&gt;
*the directory(ies) for importing formats in the M-Processing Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shared directory of the sources contains all the projects developed by all the users of M-Designer. That folder should be a Network shared drive if more than one user develops templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note iSeries:&lt;br /&gt;
In an iSeries environment, the share folder points to the mapping path set in the MAPPING iSeries preferences (option 14 then 1 from the Mapping Main Menu on the iSeries)(see chapter 2.2.a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once developed, the M-Designer projects must be generated on the production server in the import directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are the default paths of the import directory of the M-Processing Server according to the type of platform:&lt;br /&gt;
*Unix:		➔ /apps/mapping/import/&lt;br /&gt;
*Windows:	➔ C:\Mapping\M-Processing Server\Import\&lt;br /&gt;
*iSeries:		➔ /home/mapping/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to generate the project, a connection must therefore be established between the development terminals and the production server. Two types of configuration are possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a.	Access to the server using a shared directory&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1: Name given to the configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2: Shared directory for the sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3: Access path to the import directory of the M-Processing Server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The directory for accessing the server can be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A UNC path&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:		\\test_server\Mapping\M-Processing Server\Import\ (in Windows)&lt;br /&gt;
\\Test_server \home\MAPPING\ (in iSeries)&lt;br /&gt;
*A network drive pointing to the import directory&lt;br /&gt;
Example: either a network drive &amp;quot;M: &amp;quot; pointing to the &amp;quot; ...\M-Processing Server&amp;quot; folder of the production server. The access directory will therefore contain &amp;quot;M:\Import\&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Access to the server using an FTP connection&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, an FTP (or SFTP) connection must be established between the development terminal and the production server.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1: Name given to the configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
2: Choice of the connection mode: FTP, Passive FTP, Secure FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
3: IP address of the production server.&lt;br /&gt;
4: User name for the FTP access.&lt;br /&gt;
5: Related password.&lt;br /&gt;
6: Shared directory for the sources.&lt;br /&gt;
7: Access path to the import directory of the M-Processing Server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Font===&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Police&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; tab, the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Generation of XPS&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; fonts by code page field is used to pre-load the XPS fonts by defining one or several code-pages in order to optimise the processing time during the process. The separation character used in the code-pages is &amp;quot; ; &amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
Note:&lt;br /&gt;
When importing a project, if it is written with a non-registered font, an alert indicates that the font is missing and it will appear in red in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; affected Zone&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Calculation options===&lt;br /&gt;
Both options present in the Calcul tab define the types of separators used for the thousands and the decimals. This information is used for recovering integer or real values in the application (by memory zones), the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;calculations&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; made and the display of the results in the preview.&lt;br /&gt;
They have no effect on the generation of projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two equivalent variables exist for the execution on the M-Processing Server side: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MAPCPYSPLF_THOUSAND and MAPCPYSPLF_DECIMAL.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
These settings are used globally for the server however they can be set differently before running any Mapping commands in order to apply others separators used in others countries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Interface of the application==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General presentation===&lt;br /&gt;
When using M-Designer for the first time, only the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fixed Layout&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;design view is displayed. This simple display mode is used to subsequently activate the windows that you specifically require. &lt;br /&gt;
Window activation is presented in Chapter 3.2.a File Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following image shows an overview of the user interface of M-Designer. It is worth noting in this example that the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Spool File View, Properties, Conditions and Objects Tree windows&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; have been activated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It breaks down into several parts, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;File menu&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tabs of the Ribbon&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3:&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Groups of tools associated with each tab of the Ribbon&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Status bar with the tools for positioning and sizing the objects&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5: Navigation between the static part and the variable part of a project + display zoom tools.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the menus and tools displayed at the top of the window and the status bar located at the bottom is the Design Space where all the design work is done on the models.&lt;br /&gt;
This design space can also be made up of several views, in addition to the central Design view:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;View of the Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: of the format, of an object selected in the template.&lt;br /&gt;
7: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Spool File View&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: included here in the same display space as the Properties, which now has multiple tabs.&lt;br /&gt;
8: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Objects Tree View&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: list of all the objects present in the model (static part and variable part).&lt;br /&gt;
9: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;View of Conditions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: of the format, of a selected object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display positions in each view are entirely configurable according to the preferences and habits of each user. To do this, click (and hold) on the title of the view and then drag the mouse to the required display area or on a view that has already been positioned to obtain a display space with several views.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The related menus and toolbars===&lt;br /&gt;
This chapter only presents the different menus and their options available in M-Designer's interface. Each notion will be developed and set out in detail in the following chapters.&lt;br /&gt;
a.File menu&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to create a new project with the default properties (DEFAULT format, sequence 00010, page default size set to A4).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Component&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to create a new component with the default properties (page default size set to A4).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Variable Element&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to create a new variable element with the default properties (page default size set to A4).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to create a new Page Background (.mpw) or Dynamic (.mpi) document according to the selected view (Draw F or Map F). Overwrites the current document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to open an existing project by browsing the folder structure of files. The directory highlighted by default depends on the Server preferences for the application.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Component&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to open an existing component.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Variable Element&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to open an existing variable element.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to open an existing Page Background (.mpw) or Dynamic (.mpi) document according to the view selected (Draw F or Map F). Overwrites the current document.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Spool&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to select a spool file for loading it into the application as a data model for the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to save an existing Overlay (.mpw) or Dynamic (.mpi) document, according to the project view displayed (Draw F or Map F).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to save the current project. The source files of the project will be saved by keeping, if needed, the previous versions in accordance with the user's preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save as:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to save the current project (.mpw or .mpi) under another name.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to save the current project under another name. The source files of the project will be saved under the new name(s) entered by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Projects association:&lt;br /&gt;
*Used to link several projects in order to facilitate their generation. Linking a project produces an *.mpa settings file on the disk, in which the projects concerned and the generation options are listed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple generation:&lt;br /&gt;
*Used to select multiple M-Designer projects in order to generate them all in one go.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Import:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Designer File&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: in the static part of the current project, this is used to import another existing M-Designer page background such as a component or a static part of another project.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Designer XML&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to import into the application a complete M-Designer project which has previously been exported in XML format. This action imports the XML file as a new project, by recovering all of its properties and its design.&lt;br /&gt;
*Resources: used to import into the application an external resource to be used as the page background of a new project. The resources can either be XPS documents or AFPDS page backgrounds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Export:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Printer (PCL5)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to print the page background of the current project on a printer that has been acknowledged on the terminal.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Watermark (M-storage)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to export the page background of the current project as a layer that can be used in the M-Storage application.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Overlay (PCL5)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to select an M-Designer page background (.mpw) to be exported in PCL5 format to a disk.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Projects&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to select one or several projects to be exported to an archive (.zip) with any linked spools files.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Designer XML&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to export a current complete project in an XML description file. All of the properties and the design of the project are listed in the resulting file which can then be imported into another instance of the application on another terminal for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close:&lt;br /&gt;
*Used to close the current project or document and detect any changes that have not been saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preferences:&lt;br /&gt;
*See chapter 2.1 General.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Home Menu&lt;br /&gt;
The Home menu opens the general options for the project or document currently being designed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Clipboard:&lt;br /&gt;
Cut/copy/paste functions for one or more elements selected in the project (the standard keyboard shortcuts Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V are also available).&lt;br /&gt;
Function to reproduce the formatting from one element in others (texts or styles).&lt;br /&gt;
Function to duplicate a selected element and set the required number of horizontal and vertical occurrences (very useful for producing sheets of labels for example).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
System fonts:&lt;br /&gt;
Standard features for formatting texts: selection of the TTF system fonts (Windows) available on the user terminal, the size, the colour, the bold/underlined/italic options and the justification or alignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Generate:&lt;br /&gt;
Generation of the project in progress. This option is only available for a project currently undergoing the design process (open in the application).&lt;br /&gt;
Generation of an existing project link.&lt;br /&gt;
Function for exporting the overlay (see the File menu section).&lt;br /&gt;
Access to the script utility available in the M-Designer application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preview:&lt;br /&gt;
*Preview function of the projects currently undergoing the design process.&lt;br /&gt;
*Button for selecting and loading a spool file in the application (useful for the design of the document and for the preview).&lt;br /&gt;
*Multiple preview function for multi-sequence projects.&lt;br /&gt;
*Option to save an image of the preview.&lt;br /&gt;
*Option to load an XPS file as a layer (not included in the generation but displayed in the design like a pre-printed form).&lt;br /&gt;
*Option to unlink the source file (spool) from the template and to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c.Edit menu&lt;br /&gt;
The Edit menu opens the design options for the current project or document:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the Clipboard and System fonts sections, covered in this menu, the following tools are also provided:&lt;br /&gt;
Organize:&lt;br /&gt;
For one or more selected items in the design view, there is the option to place them above or below the others and manage the alignments and rotations. These options are also available in the pop-up menu of the object(s) selected and will be addressed in detail in the following chapters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Position according to grid:&lt;br /&gt;
As an assistance during design work, a grid may be displayed for the user in order to facilitate the positioning of the elements. Both buttons in this section can be used to adjust the spacing of the grid (size of the grid pattern and therefore precision of the positioning) and activate the snap-to-grid function when moving objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d.Display menu&lt;br /&gt;
The Display menu contains options for displaying different views of the application:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Show/Hide:&lt;br /&gt;
Given that none of these options are activated when opening the software for the first time, those functions which are most suitable for the basic use of M-Designer will be marked with the term (recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grid&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the grid in the design view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Top/Left Ruler&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the top and left hand rulers of the design view. It is possible to place guides in these rulers in order to align objects more easily. By using Left click in the ruler you place and collapse a rule-guide. Using Right click on an existing rule-guide will delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Spooled File View&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the loading view of the example spool file (or XML) (recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the properties view of the project and the elements (recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Conditions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the conditions view (recommended when the design work deals with a dynamic part).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Objects Tree&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the list of all the elements positioned in the document model with the option to access certain features related to each element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tab bar&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the tab navigation bar for the various projects open in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters List:&lt;br /&gt;
Contains a complete list of all the characters supported by the application according to a code page or a font page. Can be useful for inserting special characters in the document that cannot be entered directly using the keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refresh:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to refresh the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Window:&lt;br /&gt;
Small utility for working on different project windows which are open in the application with the option to activate one or the other but also to save or close one or more of the windows at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Shape menu====&lt;br /&gt;
This last menu contains all the drawings and composition tools for the model document. Depending on the part of the project concerned by the design, namely, either the page background part (static) or the dynamic part (variable), this menu is set out differently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Shape menu of the Overlay (or Static)=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the Clipboard and System fonts sections, which are included in this menu, the following tools are proposed for the design work of the page background:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert:&lt;br /&gt;
Add and position a zone containing static text with all the related formatting options.&lt;br /&gt;
Add and position a static image (like a company logo for example).&lt;br /&gt;
Add, set up and position a static table by defining the number of rows and columns, line styles and their formatting, row/column headers, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shapes:&lt;br /&gt;
Standard drawing palette for adding lines, curves, squares, rectangles, rounded rectangles, circles, ellipses, as well as some complex preset shapes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Styles:&lt;br /&gt;
Formatting options related to each of the preceding elements: contour style and colour, fill style and colour, line thickness.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate:&lt;br /&gt;
Specific option for designing a component that can be used to generate this component.&lt;br /&gt;
=====	Shape menu of the Dynamic view=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the Clipboard and System fonts sections, which are included in this menu, the following tools are provided for the dynamic design of the document:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data:&lt;br /&gt;
This group of tools includes the utilities needed to process the data of the source file (spool). It is composed of the following two types of tools:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
GROUP:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to add, configure and position the groups of data: fixed group and variable group.&lt;br /&gt;
Also used to add anchors which are used for positioning the variable groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZONE:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to add, configure and position the data recovery zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to insert the following other dynamic elements, in addition to the data from the Spool File: straight lines, rectangles, text zones input using the keyboard, dynamic images, graphics…&lt;br /&gt;
Also used to add components and/or variable elements which have been designed elsewhere in the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Quick Access&amp;quot; toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The title bar of the application finally provides a shortcut bar, or toolbar, called Quick access:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tools and functions provided in this area are completely configurable based on the preferences of each user.&lt;br /&gt;
In order to add a function to the quick access area, simply locate the function in question in the different menus and then right-click to select Ajouter à la barre d’outils Accès rapide as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
The new function then appears in the title bar:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a function in the quick access area, simply click it using the right button and select &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Supprimer de la barre d’outils Accès rapide&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The drop-down menu to the right of the quick function area is used to personalise the available functions as well as their layout (display order, add separators) using the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Personnaliser la barre d’outils Accès rapide option&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a project==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Project – Naming Conventions===&lt;br /&gt;
An M-Designer &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is the association of a layout that combines a static part of the model and a data file, referred to as the variable or dynamic part. It is identified by a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Format&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; name and a       &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sequence&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;number that makes it unique on the production server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On a PC Drive or Network share, a project is made up of three files (or five files when it deals with duplex functionality):&lt;br /&gt;
*An &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.mpw &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;file that contains the front page background (another may contain the back page background if duplex mode involved)&lt;br /&gt;
*An &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.mpi&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; file contains the formatting of data on the front (there may be another one for the back side if duplex mode involved)&lt;br /&gt;
*An &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.mpp&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;file identifies the project and creates the link between the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.mpw &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;file(s) and the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.mpi&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; file(s) and a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.pad&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; file if this one has been loaded in the GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This project concept is only worth it during the design of the model on the M-Designer side. Once generated on the production server, we then refer to it as &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;format&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;sequence&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating a project===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new project, go to the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;File&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; menu &amp;gt; &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;New&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; &amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Project&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
The view of the design then &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;displays&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; the project in the form of a white page with the default settings (portrait, A4 in simplex mode).&lt;br /&gt;
In the Display tab, it is advisable to tick Properties in the Show/Hide tab in order to display a window on the right-hand side of the screen with all the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; to be defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start by entering the following two parameters (required):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Format name = identifier of the format (no more than 10 characters).&lt;br /&gt;
*Sequence number = numeric identifier of the sequence (no more than 5 characters).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The notions of Format and Sequence will be set out in greater detail in the following paragraph.&lt;br /&gt;
Other properties can be configured in this window:&lt;br /&gt;
*Description = user information (limited to 25 characters maximum).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Comment&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = additional information.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Destination&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = path for generating the project (also defined in Preferences).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Mode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = the type of data to be formatted: SPLF (text) or XML.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Code page&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = to open a non-Unicode spool file with XPS model specifying the file code page in the project properties. The option is available only SPLF mode.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Style&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = style sheet selection (also defined in Preferences). This option is detailed below.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Document and Page&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = allows you to embed data into printer language in the output stream for the following languages: PCL5, APFDS, PDF, ZPL, DPL, TEC, PGI, IPL and EPL. A zone can contain data for several different languages. When converting the XPS to the output language, the corresponding data to the output language will be used. The data is written at the beginning and end of the document.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Orientation&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = Portrait or Landscape for the front and, possibly, the back.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Page size &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;(ISO standard formats or customised format) and margins.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Selection&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of a simplex or duplex project (with long-edge or short-edge binding).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Break page &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;= default setting of the application that processes the data page by page and which activates a page break once the data of the current page has been processed. If this break is disabled, the data on the following page will be placed after the current page.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Batch Breaking&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = defines a Metadata type zone which will be used to group the pages of the final document in sequences (see paragraph 8.8.a. Pagination management by batch breaking)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = if the page break is disabled, this option can be used to specify the position of the data on the next page, i.e. to the right of the current page (horizontal shift) or below (vertical shift).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SO/SI property is used in Windows and Unix to reproduce a native function under iSeries, i.e. the EBCDIC spool management containing both SBCS and DBCS characters (Asian and Japanese spools in particular). This property notifies the application about the detection mode and rendering of the Shift Out and Shift In information (non-printable 0x0F and 0x0E hexadecimal characters) that describes the DBCS texts in order to comply with the spacing between the characters regardless of their width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In detail, the Style option allows both to limit the usable fonts in a template but also to rename these fonts using an alias. It allows for example to simplify the use of resident fonts in a template renaming TTF fonts installed on the computer by the name of the resident fonts of the type of target printer.&lt;br /&gt;
The generated XPS file embeds the new name of the font defined in the style, it is possible to use these names for the definition of alternative fonts in the conversion profile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of style used for printing on Datamax printer:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;windows-1252&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;style&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;fonts&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 0&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 1&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 2&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 3&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 4&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 5&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 6&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 7 (OCR-A)&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 8 (OCR-B)&amp;quot;/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;font name=&amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; alias=&amp;quot;Datamax 9 (Arial)&amp;quot;/&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/fonts&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/style&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, M-Designer v8.0.2 comes with Datamax, Eltron, PGI, Intermec, TEC, and Zebra styles allowing the old non-Unicode reuse templates.&lt;br /&gt;
The selection of these styles is automatic when opening an older template.&lt;br /&gt;
The project is now ready to be developed. It is in XPS Unicode (Single use mode) by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format / Sequence notion===&lt;br /&gt;
A Format, managed using M-Processing Server, is the equivalent of an M-Designer project although it is generated and imported on the production server. The same format can be composed of several sequences. &lt;br /&gt;
Each Sequence is conditioned to run on the different pages of a data file (spool or xml).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example that helps to understand the utility of having multiple sequences for the same project:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Namely a 3-pages invoice:&lt;br /&gt;
*The first page contains the recipient's address, the sender's address as well as the beginning of the invoice table (Page type 1)&lt;br /&gt;
*All the other pages contain the body of the invoice (Page type 2)&lt;br /&gt;
*The last page contains the invoice total (Page type 2)&lt;br /&gt;
Treating this spool with the same &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;format&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is difficult because the formatting options are different depending on the types of page. Three formats will therefore be created, one for each type of page.&lt;br /&gt;
These three formats will have the same name because they all define THE &amp;quot;Invoice&amp;quot; document template but they will have a different &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;sequence number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
*Sequence 00010 that runs on the page type 1&lt;br /&gt;
*Sequence 00020 that runs on the page type 2&lt;br /&gt;
*Sequence 00030 that runs on the page type 3&lt;br /&gt;
During the execution of the invoice format on a data file, a MERGE of these three sequences will be conducted to process the spool completely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fixed layout (Draw Tab)==&lt;br /&gt;
===Definition===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fixed layout&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; includes all the fixed and static elements of an M-Designer project. An analogy may be made with the pre-printed elements in the printing sector.&lt;br /&gt;
The design of the page background is done in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Draw F&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; section, which can be opened by clicking the corresponding tab in the right-hand section of the status bar. Selecting this tab opens the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fixed layout toolbar&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in the Shapes ribbon.&lt;br /&gt;
In case of a duplex project, the back also has its own page background that will be designed in the Draw B tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The elements of the fixed layout===&lt;br /&gt;
a.Geometric shapes&lt;br /&gt;
To draw one of these &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;shapes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, simply select the corresponding icon in the Shapes tab and then click (without releasing) the place where this element has to be positioned. Then give the element its required height and width by moving the mouse and then, finally, simply release the mouse button.&lt;br /&gt;
Once drawn, a shape can be selected and dragged, and its properties (dimensions, shape and fill) can be edited.&lt;br /&gt;
Preset of complex shapes can also be selected by clicking the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Shapes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different types of filling of shapes are available from the properties of the object:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Texts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A text box can be inserted by selecting the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Text&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon and then clicking (without releasing) on the place where this box has to be positioned. As with a geometric shape, the mouse can be used to adjust the height and the width of the area. After releasing the mouse button, simply enter the text and then set the format (selection of the font, size, color, bold, alignment/justification, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c.Images&lt;br /&gt;
Add an image by selecting the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Image&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon and then clicking (without releasing) on the place where this image has to be positioned. The required height and width can be set by moving the mouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After releasing the mouse button, a window appears asking you to select the Image file to be inserted. The selected image will be added to the page background of the project with the option to preserve/not preserve the proportions of the original file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d.Static Table&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
This tool can be used to insert a so-called static table because its dimensions and properties will be defined as soon as it is created by the user. &lt;br /&gt;
Add the table by selecting the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Static table&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon and then clicking (without releasing) on the place where this image has to be positioned. After releasing the mouse button, a window appears asking you to define different settings for the rows and columns such as the size, position, number, colour, titles, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
Another way to design a table, without defining its dimensions, is by using the alternative method set out in greater detail in paragraph 8.5. Draw a table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Dynamic Part (Map Tab)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Definition===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Map section of a project refers to the dynamic part of the template that depends on each stream of data processed by this model. The main elements, which can be placed in this section are, first of all, the printable information of the data files.&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the&amp;lt;b&amp;gt; Map F&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; tab (&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MAP B&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; for the back of the document) brings up the interface related to the placement of these elements. In this design view, the elements of the Draw section appear in the form of a watermark – they are greyed and can’t be selected - to facilitate the positioning of print data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Spooled File&amp;quot; notion===&lt;br /&gt;
In order to locate and identify the print data, the design of an M-Designer project is based on a sample file. This sample file is the image of the production spool to be formatted.&lt;br /&gt;
Two types of data file are natively supported in M-Designer: paginated text files and &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XML files&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in the Mapping format. The configuration of the type of input file is done in the properties of the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Files processed by M-Designer can have &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.PAG&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.TXT&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; extension. Historically, the text files have the .PAG extension because they are paginated. A non-paged file can be paged through the MAPPAGIFS command from M-Processing Server where an argument specifying the number of lines per page (&amp;quot;Overflow&amp;quot;) will be particularly specified.&lt;br /&gt;
The XML files must comply with a preset syntax so that they can be properly used in the application (see 6.3 XML mode: syntax and specifications).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to open and display a sample file in M-Designer, the spool view must be enabled in the Display menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To load the spool file in the application, go to the Home tab and simply click   and select the file to be loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
The Spool view then displays the data to be formatted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to assist the user in designing the project, a preview is available for viewing the result without having to print the document. To do this, simply click the Preview button in the Home menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===XML mode: syntax and specifications===&lt;br /&gt;
In XML mode, the design principles are the same and are based on a sample file loaded in the application. &lt;br /&gt;
As described in Section 4.2. Creating a project, to load an xml document, it is important not to forget to go to the project Properties and check in Parameters &amp;gt; Mode = XML.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	The &amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; tags are used to define the pages of the document. In the previous example, there is only one page.&lt;br /&gt;
•	The &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt;value1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt; tags represent unit-based information (the equivalent of zones in M-Designer).&lt;br /&gt;
•	The &amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt; tags refer to a certain number of lines containing zones, like a group in M-Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
•	The &amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;line&amp;gt; tags represent the lines inside of these groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By analogy with a paper invoice:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; represents the pages of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt; represents the boundaries of the body of the invoice (from its first line to its last line).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;line&amp;gt; describes the contents of each line of the body of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt;value1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt; can represent the following two options:&lt;br /&gt;
*If this tag is outside a group, it is a unit-based element of information in the invoice. In this case, value1 represents the invoice no. in the header for example, or the client no., the type of invoice, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
*If it is located inside the definition of a group, value1 refers to the value of the zone in the line. For example, the product code, description, price, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Specifications of the XML outline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications required by M-Designer are the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The XML header must specify the encoding of the file.&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;UTF-16&amp;quot; standalone=&amp;quot;yes&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*The root tag of the XML data must be called doc.&lt;br /&gt;
*All the tags mentioned below must have at least one attribute named name. This is the attribute that identifies the information, retrieved and formatted by the application.&lt;br /&gt;
*The names of the tags and attributes are case sensitive and must be written in lowercase letters.&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to be accessed by the application, the data must be located in the pages between the &amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; tags. A document can contain multiple pages.&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside one page, the data is then organised by unit-based field (&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag) or by groups of information (&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
*The groups of information are composed of lines (&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
*The lines contain unit-based information (&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Spool view is then called XML View and presents the contents of the file in the form of the folder structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
a.Data structure&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The XML files, which are natively supported by M-Designer, have to be compliant, using a specific syntax, like the following illustration:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Spool view is then called XML View and presents the contents of the file in the form of the folder structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; tags are used to define the pages of the document. In the previous example, there is only one page.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt;value1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt; tags represent unit-based information (the equivalent of zones in M-Designer).&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt; tags refer to a certain number of lines containing zones, like a group in M-Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;line&amp;gt; tags represent the lines inside of these groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By analogy with a paper invoice:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; represents the pages of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt; represents the boundaries of the body of the invoice (from its first line to its last line).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; … &amp;lt;line&amp;gt; describes the contents of each line of the body of the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&amp;gt;value1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt; can represent the following two options:&lt;br /&gt;
*If this tag is outside a group, it is a unit-based element of information in the invoice. In this case, value1 represents the invoice no. in the header for example, or the client no., the type of invoice, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
*If it is located inside the definition of a group, value1 refers to the value of the zone in the line. For example, the product code, description, price, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.Specifications of the XML outline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications required by M-Designer are the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The XML header must specify the encoding of the file.&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;UTF-16&amp;quot; standalone=&amp;quot;yes&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*The root tag of the XML data must be called doc.&lt;br /&gt;
*All the tags mentioned below must have at least one attribute named name. This is the attribute that identifies the information, retrieved and formatted by the application.&lt;br /&gt;
*The names of the tags and attributes are case sensitive and must be written in lowercase letters.&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to be accessed by the application, the data must be located in the pages between the &amp;lt;page name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/page&amp;gt; tags. A document can contain multiple pages.&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside one page, the data is then organised by unit-based field (&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag) or by groups of information (&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
*The groups of information are composed of lines (&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
*The lines contain unit-based information (&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;…&amp;quot;&amp;gt; tag).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of an XML file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c.XML View in M-Designer&lt;br /&gt;
Loading an XML sample file in M-Designer is done in the same way as for a text file. In the XML view, data appear in the form as a list of elements:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d.Page break on a XML field value&lt;br /&gt;
In the Proprieties of a group, the page break generation can now trigger on the change in XML field value.&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;groupe&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;ligne&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;id&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;data&amp;quot;&amp;gt; data &amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;ligne&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;id&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;data&amp;quot;&amp;gt; data &amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;ligne&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;id&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;data&amp;quot;&amp;gt; data &amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;ligne&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;id&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;data&amp;quot;&amp;gt; data &amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
…&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, if the used field for generating a page break is the field “id” then the page break will be generated after the execution of the second line.&lt;br /&gt;
In the interface, it exists several options for the “&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Page break&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;” parameter:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;None&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the group generate no page break.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Limit&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the group triggers a page break on a positioning limit.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XML Field&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the group triggers a page break on a XML field value change.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Limit and XML Field&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the group triggers a page break on a positioning limit and on a XML field value change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Management of the recovery of headers, when generating automatic page breaks, is possible with the options &amp;quot;Header&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Last header&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Header&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: to choose the name of the line of the XML file for as header.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Last header&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: if checked, this option allows to keep only the last header. The box is checked by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When generating a page break, the last header (or all of the above headings, if the option is unchecked) are taken at the start of the new page.&lt;br /&gt;
If the XML, two header lines follow, they are considered as a single header.&lt;br /&gt;
If a page break is triggered just after a header line, it is not printed and is carried over to the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Edit a variable list of items in a table====&lt;br /&gt;
To display a list of present items in a group in a table, it must go through the script tool.&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;rowtable function&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; allows to rearrange the lines of a group so as to obtain a horizontal distribution of elements.&lt;br /&gt;
Syntax:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;rowtotable&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;(group name, maximal number of columns);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;rowtable function&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;has two settings:&lt;br /&gt;
*Group name: contains group name to be reorganized in table, surrounded by double quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Maximal number of columns: maximal number of columns of the table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 6&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 7&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 8&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To rearrange this group as a three-column table, use the following script:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
rowtotable(&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;,3);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
This script will effectively change the group which then becomes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 6&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 7&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name_2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 8&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dynamic elements===&lt;br /&gt;
This part of the documentation presents the basic elements that can be added in the dynamic part of a project in order to get started with the main features of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A) Zone===&lt;br /&gt;
====Definition====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is the main element, which allows you to retrieve information in the input data in order to position and format them in the final graphical document.&lt;br /&gt;
In &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;text mode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, the information is identified by the following three elements of data: &lt;br /&gt;
*a row number; &lt;br /&gt;
*a column number; &lt;br /&gt;
*a length. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XML mode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, it is identified by the name of the XML field (field tag).&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can only read one row at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
In the design space, it is represented in the following two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is empty, no data is associated with it: an icon appears in the upper right corner of the latter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is associated with an &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;element&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of data, it appears without an &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;icon&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A zone is identified by its name, defined in the properties window (more details in a.2 Create a zone).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a zone====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;create &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; the zone, you have the following two options:&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the corresponding icon and its type in the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Data &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; tab and click (without releasing) the place where the element has to be positioned. This method creates an empty  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. To link the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;zone &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; to an element of data of the source file, simply select the data in the Spool view (see the second method below) and drag-and-drop it in the previously created zone by holding down the Ctrl key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Immediately select the data to be recovered in the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Spool view &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and drag-and-drop it to the desired location on the design space in order to automatically create a zone linked to the selected data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the zone has been created, select it and display the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; view to enter its information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Name (of the zone): information for M-Designer's internal use to identify the different objects in the project. This field is empty when creating an empty zone and is equivalent to the value of the element of data during a zone creation using the Spool view.&lt;br /&gt;
*Text printed before/after: option to add text before and/or after the retrieved information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Identification of the position of the information in the data spool: column, length, start line.&lt;br /&gt;
Also used to extract a certain quantity of information in XML mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position in the document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to change the positioning of the zone on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Data Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to define how the M-Designer application must process the retrieved information (see a.3 Types of Zones).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Font&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to set all the formatting options for the information: font, size, color, framing, orientation, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Type of Zones====&lt;br /&gt;
The M-Designer application offers various options for processing the information according to the type of data to be processed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Text&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to print plain text&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Normal&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: exactly reproduces the values located in the positions defined by the zone whether they are letters, numbers or blanks.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Optimized&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: reproduces the characters located in these positions except for the blanks at the beginning and at the end of these positions. Consequently, the framing to the left or to the right is always observed. There is no shift due to blanks in the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Substitution&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to replace a value of the spool by another one stored in a file called replacevalue.txt. By default, this file is in its blank state in the installation folder of M-Designer. In order to carry out the substitutions, place it in the lgobitmap folder. It must contain the values to be replaced followed by replacement values separated by a tab. This sub-type is addressed in greater detail in paragraph 8.3. Replacing characters.&lt;br /&gt;
:: {{warning}} '''Attention:''' il est impératifs que le fichier replacevalue.txt ai le même encodage que le projet Onyx Designer. Par exemple, replaceValue.txt doit être unicode si le projet est unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Translate&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to substitute a value with its equivalent translated into another language. Initially, a Tools/Set Lang type zone is used to define the file which contains the translations. For each Text/Translate zone defined in the template, the program seeks for the entry that matches the value of the zone in the file that contains the translations. This should be found in the lgobitmap folder and its name must begin with “Translate_”.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Compressed&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: area displaying the recovered text into the allocated space. The text occupies the width of the zone and adjusts the font size between a maximum and a minimum so that the text is displayed completely in the allocated space. If the minimum font size does not display the full text, it is truncated and followed by &amp;quot;...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Truncated&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: area displaying the recovered text into the space allocated by the zone width. If the text cannot be fully displayed, it is truncated followed by &amp;quot;...&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Barcode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to encode and print barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;The list&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of available barcodes is set out in detail in chapter 8.1 Barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;tools&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to insert a page number, images, … but also to display the (total) number of pages, of pages in the current batch, … &lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Page Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to number each edited page. The page number is not necessarily the same as that in the original spool. If M-Processing Server is set to exclude certain pages, the number of edited pages will not necessarily be the same as the number of pages in the original spool.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Batch Number&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the batch number.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Page Number (Batch)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the page number in the current batch.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Total Number of Pages&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the total number of pages in the entire document.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Total Number of Batches&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the total number of batches in the entire document.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Total Number of pages (Batch)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to display the total number of pages in the current batch.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Specific Replacement&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: replaces a value present in the spool processed by another value retrieved in a file. For example, you can replace the customer number that appears in the spool by the name of this customer that you retrieve in a database file.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Image&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: prints a different image based on a value of the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Export&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: this type of zone is used to retrieve an element of information from the spool and export it to a physical file.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;File Replace&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: retrieves the text stored in a file. The name of the zone must match the name of the file. This should be found in the lgobitmap folder and is called data_ZONENAME.txt (where ZONENAME is the actual name of the zone).&lt;br /&gt;
The row and length settings of the zone indicate the row and length of the text to be retrieved.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Input Text&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to create interactive input fields for designing SOAP forms in PDF or HTML format. When the user opens the form generated in Adobe Reader or an internet browser, the latter may fill in the input fields and send the data to an M-Processing Server URL, in a web entry point by clicking the SUBMIT button, given that the latter is actually a Tools/Input Text zone called SUBMIT (system name).&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;HyperLink&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: adds a URL link.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Set Lang&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to specify the file containing the translations. This should be found in the lgobitmap folder and its name must begin with “Translate_”. This particular zone cannot be printed in the final document and is not visible for visualisation or re-modelling. Although the name of this zone is not very important, it must be declared before any other M-Designer zone that requires a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
::Then, for each Text/Translate type zone defined in the template, the program will seek the entry that matches the value of the zone in the file that contains the translations.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XPS Message&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to insert an XPS file in the current page. The zone is actually a link to an XPS file present on the M-Processing Server. This file can only contain one page and is found in the lgobitmap directory (directly or in a sub-directory). It is not case sensitive.&lt;br /&gt;
If you change the XPS file, it will affect all the projects using it.&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XPS File&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: By contrast with the XPS Messages, the files inserted using the XPS File type zones:&lt;br /&gt;
*** can contain several pages&lt;br /&gt;
*** are whole pages&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;create additional &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;pages in the output file&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Metadata&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to index the document for archiving (not-printed data)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Index&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: area index by default and used in XPS manipulations and in M-Storage Manager as a criterion.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapFrom&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to set the email sender.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapSend&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to define the address of the recipient.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapCopy&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to set the copy recipient.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapBCopy&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to define the recipient in hidden copy.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapNote&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to define the body of the email.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapSubject&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to define the mail subject.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapOrg&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending faxes. The value range for this area will be used to identify the sender.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapTo&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending faxes. The value shown by this area will be used to define the recipient.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapUser&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending faxes. The value range for this area will be used to identify the owner.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MapFormat&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: index reserved for sending email. The value range for this area will be used to define the document format (.BMP, .JPG, .EXE, .PAG, .PDF, .TIF, .TIF_FAX, .TXT, .XLS).&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Memory&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to insert and store information (not printed) which will be recovered and used in the template. (see 8.1.b.Combined data). Different Memory zones can be designed in order to:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Text&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save alphanumeric information and delete the spaces after the text.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Text with spaces&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save alphanumeric information and keep spaces after the text.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Integer&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save integer-type digital information.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Float&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save floating-type digital information.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;SQL&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save alphanumeric information found in a database using an SQL query.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Protect SQL&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save alphanumeric information found in a database using a protected SQL query.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Math. calculation&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: use memory zones to perform a calculation.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Memory Replacement&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: retrieve information saved in the memory zone.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Memory Translate&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: save alphanumeric information resulting from the automatic translation of the information retrieved in the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Graph&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to generate a graph using multiple elements of data:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graph data&lt;br /&gt;
X-axis data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Y-axis data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graph title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
X-axis title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Y-axis title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Legend data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Minimum value of the Y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum value of the Y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No. of intervals of the Y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rounding to the nearest n of the Y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Origin of the Y-axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The construction of a graph is detailed in section 8.6. Construction of a graph.&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 8.0.2, M-Designer has the ability to automatically convert old graphs types in complex graphics. This feature facilitates the conversion of old projects in XPS projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Conversion&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: used to convert digital data according to the conversion rules (Euro to Dollar for example) defined in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;M-Processing Server &amp;gt; M-Designer Management &amp;gt; Rates (01=E1; 02=E2; etc&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;XPS PrintTicket&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: &lt;br /&gt;
Copy: number of copies to print.&lt;br /&gt;
Input Bin: input bin number (printer paper feed).&lt;br /&gt;
Output Bin: output bin number.&lt;br /&gt;
Media Type: Pre-printed, Pink, Thick …&lt;br /&gt;
Force Front Side: determines the mode Single / Duplex when printing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Commands&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: adds data in the print stream directly into printer language. As for the project properties, Document and Page (See 4.2 Creating a project), a &amp;quot;Commands&amp;quot; zone defines the printer language data for the following languages: PCL5, APFDS, PDF, ZPL, DPL, TEC, PGI, IPL and EPL. A zone can contain data for several different languages. When converting the XPS to the output language, the corresponding data to the output language will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Language&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: language selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Enable&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: enable zone for the selected language.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Pre- and Post-Printing&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the written data before and after the retrieved data from the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The writing of hexadecimal data in the &amp;quot;pre&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;post-printing&amp;quot; is possible by using the following syntax: \x followed by the hexadecimal value of two characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====A Group====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Definition=====&lt;br /&gt;
A group can be used to retrieve several rows of a spool. It is defined by a start row and an end row. In the design space, it is shown in red:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A group can be fixed (fixed start and end rows) or variable (variable start and end rows).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a fixed group====&lt;br /&gt;
To create a fixed group, you can use the same methods as when creating a zone.&lt;br /&gt;
*Create a group from the Ribbon menu, select the data in the source file and drag-and-drop them in the group previously created by holding down the Ctrl key.&lt;br /&gt;
*Immediately select the data in the Spool view and drag-and-drop it to the desired location on the design space to automatically create a group linked to the selected zone of the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the group has been created, you must enter the information in the Properties view:&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Name (of the group): information for M-Designer's internal use to identify the different objects in the project. This field is empty when creating an empty group and is equivalent to the value of the first row of the selection of data during the creation of a group using the Spool view&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position in the document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to change the positioning of the group on the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Identification of the start and end rows of the block of information to be recovered&lt;br /&gt;
Offset: print position of the first row in relation to the group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Option&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusive conditions: for a row of the group, a true condition will be performed exclusively without testing the following rows&lt;br /&gt;
Table: allows zones of a group to behave like the cells of a table. Therefore, zones of the same line find themselves automatically pasted. Resize or move a zone impact size and positioning of adjacent zones. In addition, the group's lines (or conditions) are visually represented in the design window. The zones are vertically distributed according to their line. This option is detailed in paragraph 8.5.b. Draw a dynamic table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Variable&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to change the type of group: from fixed (the start and end rows are static) to variable (the&lt;br /&gt;
Given that the limits of the data selection zone are defined using the Start line and End Line fields of the group, the data must now be retrieved by creating one or more Zones inside the group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Summary&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
*The selection zone of the data block is configured by creating a Group:&lt;br /&gt;
*The data is retrieved inside this block of data by creating a Zone: &lt;br /&gt;
*We can then see that all the rows of our block of data are retrieved using the preview function (Ctrl+W). It is possible to create several Zones from the data block, place them in the group and condition their page layout (see 6.4.c. A condition).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Create a variable group====&lt;br /&gt;
The principle of the variable group is identical to that of the fixed group, i.e. it can be used to retrieve several rows of information in the spool. When the start and end row of the group is not always in the same place in the spool or you do not want the information to be always printed in the same place in the page, then you must use a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;variable group &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
A variable group uses a start condition and an end condition. The group begins to run when a condition is validated and it stops when another condition is validated or when it has executed a certain number of rows. A variable group can be performed once or more times in the page.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the position of the values printed by a  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;variable group &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be variable. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, you can define the settings so that the values printed by a  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;group &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;are positioned after the values printed by another  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;group &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. We refer to this as relative positioning. &lt;br /&gt;
You can also define the settings so that the invoice total is always printed one centimeter after the last row of the detail (whether there are 5 or 20 rows). The position of the invoice total will therefore change according to the number of rows of products in the invoice, for instance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A group may vary in:&lt;br /&gt;
*size: the start and end rows are dynamically set by the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;conditions &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
*print position: variable groups can be linked one after the other so that the following group is printed straight after the current group finishes.&lt;br /&gt;
These two types of variable can exist separately or jointly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a variable group, simply click the   icon and draw the group in the design space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Properties view is displayed so that the group information can be entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Name (of the group): information for M-Designer's internal use in order to identify the different objects in the project. This field is empty when creating an empty group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position in the document&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to change the positioning of the group on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Position&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Offset: print position of the first row in relation to the group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Option&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusive conditions: for a row of the group, a true condition will be performed exclusively without testing the following rows&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat: if the start condition appears several times, the group will run several times provided that the end condition has been validated in the meantime&lt;br /&gt;
MapOffice: To be checked in order to design a MapOffice group (refer to the M-Connect documentation for Office document rules of design).&lt;br /&gt;
Table: allows zones of a group to behave like the cells of a table. Therefore, zones of the same line find themselves automatically pasted. Resize or move a zone impact size and positioning of adjacent zones. In addition, the group's lines (or conditions) are visually represented in the design window. The zones are vertically distributed according to their line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Variable&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
Used to change the type of group: from fixed (the start and end rows are static) to variable (the start and end rows are variable and defined by conditions).&lt;br /&gt;
Spacing: spacing before the printing of the group.&lt;br /&gt;
Type of stop condition: used to condition the end of the execution of the variable group, with a condition or a fixed number of lines.&lt;br /&gt;
Previous group: refers to the group after which the variable group is executed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A Condition ===&lt;br /&gt;
====Execution condition====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;execution conditions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; are used to run, or not run, the object conditioned in accordance with a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;value in the spool&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
A condition can apply to a page, a component, a group, a zone, a line or a rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the condition is valid, the object is executed. Otherwise, no further action is taken. In order to complete two different actions depending on the presence of a spool value or not, you must create two objects.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Example: You want to write in black for an Invoice value and in red for a Credit note value in a spool row. You must then create a zone with a black font when it is an Invoice, and a zone that uses a red font when it is a Credit note because you cannot create the following unique condition for a particular zone: &amp;quot;black font if Invoice and red font if Credit note&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The conditions are managed differently if the object is fixed or if it belongs to a group. Indeed, in a group, the condition is named and linked to the group. Therefore, we can associate multiple objects to a single condition without having to re-enter the latter each time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Start condition====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;start condition&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; defines the first row for the execution of the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;variable group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. The group begins to run on the row where the start condition is true.&lt;br /&gt;
 M-Processing Server tests the validity of the condition from the first row of the spool (row 1). As soon as the condition is verified, the group begins to run. It stops when the end condition is verified in its turn.&lt;br /&gt;
 The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;start condition&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is used to determine if the group is to be printed at a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;fixed&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position on the page or in a relative positioning in relation to another group. It is also possible to set it so that the group is printed one centimeter after the end of another group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;start condition&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; for the group is not verified on any of the rows of the spool, the group is not executed.&lt;br /&gt;
If the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;start condition&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is verified on several rows of the spool, the group runs only once: from the first row where the condition is verified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====End condition====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The end row of a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;variable group&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; can be defined in two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
*number of execution rows,&lt;br /&gt;
*end condition.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By knowing the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;number of rows&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; for which the variable group must run, it is possible to set the input number after you have ticked Number of lines.&lt;br /&gt;
The stop condition is not a comparison test in relation to a value present in the spool but the row number after which the group stops.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The end condition sets the last row for the execution of the variable group. The group stops running on the row where the end condition is true. Furthermore, this row can be excluded (not executed) or included (executed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c.4.	Exclusive condition&lt;br /&gt;
In a group, it is possible to manage several conditions. By default, there is only one which is the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;None&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; condition that applies for all newly created zones. That condition is always TRUE (valid).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Example:&lt;br /&gt;
In a group containing product rows, there may be rows of &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;sub-totals&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. It is possible to use several zones for printing these different types of row (to display the sub-totals in bold for example) using a condition.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In this case there are basically two conditions: a Sub-total condition, which is linked to at least one zone that prints in bold and the None condition, which is linked to the zone that has standard writing for the product rows.&lt;br /&gt;
If the group operates using &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;exclusive conditions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, a single condition is applied per row, even if several are true (only the first created condition is applied). The product rows are printed as standard by the zone under the None condition and the rows of sub-totals are printed in bold by the zone under the “Sub-total” condition.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the group operates using &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;non-exclusive conditions&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, all the verified conditions are applied by row. In this case, the sub-total rows are printed twice, once in bold by the zone under the Sub-total condition and once as standard by the zone under the None condition. Indeed, the None condition is always true, as mentioned previously.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Operation using &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;non-exclusive&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; conditions is very rarely used. It requires adding the reverse conditions to other conditions in the filters of a condition. In this type of operation, the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;None&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; condition is not used. It is only used to repeat the printout of an element of information, or to print the information contained on a single spool row, on two rows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The None condition cannot be deleted. If you do not want to use it, do not link it to an object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Comparison type====&lt;br /&gt;
When setting the conditions, you can test:	&lt;br /&gt;
*The existence in the row: there is in a row or in the entire page.&lt;br /&gt;
*The non-existence in the row: there is not in a row or in the entire page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Strict greater than (digital): &amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Equal to or greater than (digital): =&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Strictly less than (digital): &amp;lt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Equal to or less than (digital): =&amp;lt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The number of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
*The number of the row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tests are used by M-Designer to validate a condition or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Generate a project==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the template has been completed, all that remains to be done is to generate it for its use in M-Processing Server. &lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click the Generate the project button of the Home menu.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Save Project window opens, check that the generation path is correct. By default, the project is generated in the docpc directory of the Import folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Unix:		/apps/mapping/import/docpc/&lt;br /&gt;
*Windows:	 C:\Mapping\M-Processing Server\Import\docpc\&lt;br /&gt;
*iSeries:		 /home/mapping/docpc/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A post-generation window opens once the project has been generated to notify you of the result(s) of the generation.&lt;br /&gt;
The template is now ready to be imported in M-Processing Server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Advanced features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Barcode===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Creation of a barcode====&lt;br /&gt;
To create a barcode in M-Designer, simply create a Barcode type zone and select the required barcode sub-type.&lt;br /&gt;
Note:&lt;br /&gt;
The 1D barcodes use fonts (you should download Mapping Fonts on the technical server at the http://server.mappingsuite.com). The 2D barcodes are images and do not require any font selection in M-Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====The types of barcodes=====&lt;br /&gt;
*EAN 8&lt;br /&gt;
This barcode is used to track logistics units and identify stock keeping units. The eight characters version is used for small sized packages. The data must contain seven digits. The eighth character is a check digit which is calculated by the computer.&lt;br /&gt;
*EAN 13&lt;br /&gt;
This barcode is used to track logistics units and identify stock keeping units. In an EAN 13 code, the first two characters are the identifiers of the country of origin, the other 10 are the data and the last is the check digit which is calculated by the computer. The data must contain 12 digits.&lt;br /&gt;
*Code 39&lt;br /&gt;
This barcode is used to encode alphanumeric data. It is used in almost every industry except the retail sector. The data may be of variable length and may contain letters and digits.&lt;br /&gt;
The information can be of any length and contain digits, uppercase letters and the “space”, “plus sign”, “minus sign”, “division”, “dot”, “percentage” and “dollar” characters.&lt;br /&gt;
*Code 128&lt;br /&gt;
The information to be encoded can be of any length and composed of:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optimised: digits, uppercase letters, lowercase letters, printing or non-printing ASCII characters (0 - 128), and all the function signs and characters provided by the Code 128 in the A, B and C code sets, with systematic length optimisation.&lt;br /&gt;
N/Optimised: digits, uppercase letters, lowercase letters, printing or non-printing ASCII characters (0 - 128), and all the function signs and characters provided by the Code 128 in the B code set, without length optimisation&lt;br /&gt;
Digital: digits and check character provided by the Code 128 in the C code set, with systematic length optimisation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They are used to encode general alphanumeric data and ASCII data. These barcodes are used in many industries for stock management purposes. The data is of variable length. The Code 128 C must contain an even number of characters (otherwise a zero is added at the beginning of the barcode) and may only contain digits. The Code 128 B accepts all ASCII characters, whereas the Code 128 A accepts only some of them.&lt;br /&gt;
*Code 2/5 interleaved &lt;br /&gt;
This encoding of numbers is used to enter information about the density of products, in response to precise specifications.&lt;br /&gt;
The security of this symbology is weak, except when using optional security measures (check character, messages of fixed length that are checked when scanning).&lt;br /&gt;
Although the length of the barcode is unlimited in terms of the number of characters, the principle of interleaving requires the following:&lt;br /&gt;
an even number of digits when the optional check character is not used&lt;br /&gt;
an odd number of digits when the optional check character is used&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Code 2/5 industrial&lt;br /&gt;
Digital information encoding that is designed for its ease of use&lt;br /&gt;
Development or modification of pre-existing applications&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This old symbology was frequently used in industry, particularly the automotive industry. The security of this symbology is weak, unless it is used with messages of fixed-length and checked when scanning.&lt;br /&gt;
The data must contain 1 to 32 digits.&lt;br /&gt;
*EAN128 Alpha n/optimized&lt;br /&gt;
Encoding of alphanumeric information&lt;br /&gt;
Variable length&lt;br /&gt;
Continuous bidirectional self-checking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Used for identifying dispatch units (pallets or cartons, possibly).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
	EAN128 digital&lt;br /&gt;
•	Encoding of digital information&lt;br /&gt;
•	Variable length&lt;br /&gt;
•	Continuous bidirectional self-checking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Used for identifying dispatch units (pallets or cartons, possibly).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*PDF 417&lt;br /&gt;
Two-dimensional&lt;br /&gt;
Alphanumeric 2000 length&lt;br /&gt;
Eight levels of security&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Used in every sector of activity. The PDF417 code is the only two-dimensional barcode that can be scanned using a simple linear scan (1D) due to the fact that, as stacked linear symbology, it has the features of linear barcodes as well as two-dimensional ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Data Matrix&lt;br /&gt;
This code can encode up to 2335 characters. Various types of encoding are available (ASCII, C40, text and Base 256). The default mode is the automatic mode which can be used to optimise the encoding by swapping from one mode to the other depending on the data. It also has an error detection/correction system for repairing any damage.&lt;br /&gt;
*Postnet&lt;br /&gt;
The Postnet barcode is used by the United States postal service. It has been replaced by the USPS or Intelligent Mail barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
*Planet&lt;br /&gt;
The Planet barcode is used by the United States postal service. It has been replaced by the USPS or Intelligent Mail barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
*QR Code&lt;br /&gt;
It has the particular feature of being able to encode a very large number of characters (7336 in numeric mode). This type of barcode is very widespread in Japan. There are four types of encoding (alphanumeric, numeric, bytes, Kanji) for compressing the data by varying degrees depending on the type of data. By default, an automatic mode is used to choose the encoding method that will give the best compression rate (switch of mode while processing). Error detection/correction codes are added to the data, which are used to prevent the loss of data in the event of damage. There are four levels of error detection/correction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*MaxiCode&lt;br /&gt;
The MaxiCode barcodes, developed by UPS - United Parcel Service, are defined by the ISO 16023-2000 standard. Unlike the others, it has a set size, which limits the number of characters to be encoded. Indeed, the maximum number of characters is 93 alphanumeric characters or 138 numeric characters. There are two types of encoding. The first only encodes a string of characters containing data according to a conventional type of encoding and a standard type of error detection/correction. The second type encodes the following three fields in addition to the string of data: the country which is encoded using 3 digits according to the ISO 3166 standard, the postal code which is encoded using 6 characters and finally a type of service using 3 digits. These three fields are encoded using an extended error correction mode contrary to the string of data whose correction mode is standard.&lt;br /&gt;
*Japan Postal&lt;br /&gt;
The Japan Postal barcode is used by the Japanese postal service.&lt;br /&gt;
*Codabar (NW7)&lt;br /&gt;
In Japan, the Codabar Monarch is also called NW-7. The relatively simple composition of the Codabar Monarch means that it is frequently used to encode serial numbers for applications involving blood bank transfusion services, home deliveries, libraries, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
*USPS&lt;br /&gt;
USPS = United States Postal Service. The more commonly used official name is the Intelligent Mail Barcode. It is the new American postal barcode, which is to replace the Planet and the Postnet. The Intelligent Mail barcode is a 4-state barcode composed of 65 bars.&lt;br /&gt;
*UPC-A&lt;br /&gt;
The UPC-A barcode is a U.S. equivalent of the EAN13 barcode, the first digit of which is 0. It is used primarily to identify products in store. The UPC-A barcode can encode 11 digits, a number system, five digits for the Manufacturing Code and five digits for the product code. A 12th digit is calculated using the first eleven in order to act as a check digit. Font used: BCUPCA.ttf&lt;br /&gt;
*UPC-E&lt;br /&gt;
The UPC-E barcode is a short version of the UPC-A barcode, in which the ten digits of the UPC-A barcode (manufacturing and product code) are reduced to six digits by removing superfluous zeros. With the Number System and the check digit, a UPC-E barcode is therefore composed of eight digits. M-Designer can be used to include UPC-A (11 digits) barcodes in the UPC-E format as well as a code reduced to 6, 7 or 8 digits. Font used: BCUPCE.ttf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*MSI&lt;br /&gt;
The MSI barcode is used primarily for stock management, marking storage containers and shelving in warehouse environments. An MSI barcode uses one or two check keys calculated using the Modulo 10 or Modulo 11 methods and is used to encode numeric values of indefinite size. M-Designer can encode using either a Modulo 10 check key, a Modulo 11 check key, two Modulo 10 check keys, or even a Modulo 11 check key followed by a Modulo 10 check key. Font used: BCMSI.ttf without label and with label: BCMSIL.ttf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====The size of the barcode=====&lt;br /&gt;
The size of the barcode can be defined in the following two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
*The first involves choosing the Fit the area option in the Properties view, in which case the barcode will be adjust as well as possible to the size of the zone, according to its standard.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the Fit the area option is unticked, the size of the barcode can be set by the size of the font of the zone. This size affects the width and the height of the code. The height can be reduced by reducing the percentage of the height setting of the zone.&lt;br /&gt;
Comment:&lt;br /&gt;
In order to label a barcode, simply select a labelled font.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Combined data====&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to combine data found in different places in the spool within a single barcode. In order to achieve this, it is necessary to create as many memory zones as there are elements of data to be retrieved from the spool and then all these zones must be combined in the label of the barcode zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Map F  tab:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Properties view:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In this example, the Memory zone have the values:&lt;br /&gt;
*MEM_FACT : 0012601&lt;br /&gt;
*MEM_DTFACT : 14/10/99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 It is also possible to add text that is not found in the spool using the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Memory&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; zones (detailed in paragraph 6.4.a.3 Type of zones): [[MEM1]]TEXT[[MEM2]].&lt;br /&gt;
If you use replacement zones in a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Barcode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; zone, &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;the Length of the barcode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; zone must be equal to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
====Special case: EAN128====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The encoding of the EAN128 is identical to the encoding of the Code128. That is why we use the same fonts. The difference is that the EAN128 is structured in order to standardize the information that it contains. To achieve this, an AI (Application Identify) is inserted between each piece of information, which is used to identify the data encoded. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Structure of the EAN128: START FNC1 AI DATA (FNC1) AI DATA .... (FNC1) AI DATA CRC END &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FNC1: Separator character of the EAN128. &lt;br /&gt;
AI: Application Identifier, is used to encode several standardized elements of information in one code (date+time+etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first FNC1 is automatically added by M-Designer. It is required as it is used to differentiate an EAN128 barcode from a CODE128 barcode. &lt;br /&gt;
However, the following FNC1 are optional. Indeed, they are only required when the previous element of data does not have a fixed length, in which case they are used to separate each element of data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to insert the FNC1 character, you have to put the paragraph (§) character in your spool. This character will automatically be replaced by FCN1 characters by the M-Processing Server. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: SPOOL ----&amp;gt; MAPPING &lt;br /&gt;
AI DATA ----&amp;gt; START FNC1 AI DATA CRC END &lt;br /&gt;
AI DATA § AI DATA ----&amp;gt; START FNC1 AI DATA FNC1 AI DATA CRC END &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you cannot change your spool to add the &amp;quot;§&amp;quot; character or if you want to combine several elements of data that are located in different places in the spool (see previous paragraph: 8.1.b. Combined data), you can use the memory zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note:&lt;br /&gt;
The AIs of the EAN128 barcode label must be in brackets. This is not managed by the barcode fonts, so you have to create a text zone under the barcode in order to add the label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special case: code 128====&lt;br /&gt;
There are three encoding modes for 128 barcodes: &lt;br /&gt;
A mode (alphanumeric) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
B mode (alphanumeric). The code 128 Alphanumeric encodes in B mode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
C mode (numeric). The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;code 128 Alphanumeric&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; encodes in C mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;code 128 Alphanumeric&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Optimized switches from B mode to C mode automatically in order to optimize the size of the barcode. &lt;br /&gt;
However, your barcode may have to comply with a specific type of formatting, i.e. a certain number of characters in A, B or C mode. &lt;br /&gt;
For example, the barcode that corresponds to the mail tracking ID of &amp;quot;La Poste&amp;quot; contains 13 characters. The first three must be encoded in B mode and the last ten in C mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to create this &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;barcode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; using M-Designer, you must create a &amp;quot;Code 128 N/Optimized&amp;quot; type zone and then enter a formatting screen in the Advanced options of this zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
For the following data: 1J45034500751 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You want to encode: &lt;br /&gt;
*the first three characters (1J4) in B Mode &lt;br /&gt;
*the last ten characters (5034500751) in C mode &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your formatting mask must therefore be BBBCCCCC. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will notice that although there are ten digits to be encoded in C mode, there are only five 'C's in the formatting mask. This is due to the fact that one character in C mode encodes two digits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special case: Codabar====&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create documents containing Codabar type barcodes (also known by the name of NW-7 in Japan).&lt;br /&gt;
Given that this type of barcode does not require encoding or check characters, there is no &amp;quot;CODABAR&amp;quot; type zone in M-Designer. In this case, simply create a text zone that uses the BCCodabar or BCCodabarL font.&lt;br /&gt;
However, this type of barcode must begin with a start character and an end character (character A, B, C or D). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the start and end characters are not present in your data, you will need to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1)Create a memory zone to contain the data of the barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
2)Create a memory replacement type zone to contain the element of data plus the start and end character. This zone must use the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;BCCodabar or BCCodabarL&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; font.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Special case: 2D Barcode====&lt;br /&gt;
Currently, MAPPING manages four types of 2D barcode: PDF417, DATA MATRIX, QR CODE and MAXICODE. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In PCL5 and PDF: PDF417 - DATA MATRIX - QR CODE - MAXICODE &lt;br /&gt;
In ZEBRA: PDF417 - DATA MATRIX &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These barcodes do not require the selection of any special fonts. &lt;br /&gt;
In PCL5 and PDF, the &amp;quot;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Barcode width&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot; setting is used to change the size of the barcode. &lt;br /&gt;
In ZEBRA, the selected font size is used to change the size of the barcode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The benefit of 2D barcodes is being able to encode a number of important pieces of information. If the data that you need to encode is located in different places in the spool, go to paragraph 8.1.b. Combined data in order to combine them in a single barcode. &lt;br /&gt;
Please note that this type of barcode manages optimizations (switching from alphanumeric to numeric) and the size of the barcodes may therefore vary in height and width depending on the content to be encoded.&lt;br /&gt;
=====QR code=====&lt;br /&gt;
The QR CODE barcode was developed according to the International ISO/IEC 18004 standard. It has the particular feature of being able to encode a very large number of characters (7336 in numeric mode). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of barcode is very widespread in Japan. It is already used in industry, but has also been adopted by the general public since mobile phones have been able decode it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are four types of encoding (alphanumeric, numeric, bytes, Kanji) for compressing the data by varying degrees depending on the type of data. By default, the automatic mode is used to choose the encoding method that will give the best compression rate (switch of mode while processing). For example, let us assume that the beginning of the string contains alphanumeric type data. As soon as the program detects a string of at least 13 numeric characters, it changes encoding mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error detection/correction codes are added to the data. These codes prevent losing data through damage. There are four levels of error detection/correction. By default, level three is used, whose codes use approximately 25% of the final barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available advanced options: &lt;br /&gt;
Barcode width: Value between 1 and 15 specifying the size of the barcode &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error Level: (7%, 15%, 25% and 30%) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCN1:&lt;br /&gt;
*ECI protocol not implemented&lt;br /&gt;
*ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first position&lt;br /&gt;
*ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in second position In the last case, a separator character (Application identifier) must be specified. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Application Identifier: Separator character, used only with the implicit FCN1 in second position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Type of encoding:&lt;br /&gt;
AUTO: Automatic encoding of the data with a mode change depending on the data&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ALPHA: Alphanumeric encoding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NUMERIC: Numeric encoding &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BYTE: Encoding in bytes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====DATAMATRIX=====&lt;br /&gt;
The Datamatrix barcode is defined by the International ISO/IEC 16022 (ECC200) standard. This code can encode up to 2335 characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Various types of encoding are available (ASCII, C40, text and Base 256) and the default mode is the automatic mode that can be used to optimize the encoding by swapping from one mode to the other depending on the data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It also has an error detection/correction system for repairing any damage.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Advanced options: &lt;br /&gt;
*Barcode width: Value between 1 and 15 specifying the size of the barcode &lt;br /&gt;
*Type of encoding: &lt;br /&gt;
AUTO: Automatic encoding of the data with a mode change depending on the data&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oASCII: The ASCII encoding is a tacit plan for encoding the ASCII data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
C40: C40 encoding transforms 3 alphanumeric characters into two code words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TEXT: The Text encoding is used to encode the lowercase characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====PDF 417=====&lt;br /&gt;
The PDF 417 is defined by the International ISO/IEC 15438 standard. This type of barcode can encode up to 2700 numeric characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three types of data encoding (alphanumeric, numeric and bytes). The automatic mode chooses the best compression rate and changes the mode while encoding. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are also eight levels of error detection/correction mode. In automatic mode, the level is chosen according to the number of characters to be encoded.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Advanced options: &lt;br /&gt;
Barcode width: Value between 1 and 15 specifying the size of the barcode &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error Level: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*AUTO: automatic choice. &lt;br /&gt;
*0 - 8 &lt;br /&gt;
Compact mode: Activation of the compact mode or not. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ratio: Used to determine the height/width ratio of the barcode &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fixed columns: Used to define the number of columns. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fixed rows: Used to define the number of rows. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selection of a ratio prevents you from specifying the number of rows and columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====UPS MAXICODE=====&lt;br /&gt;
This type of barcode, developed by UPS - United Parcel Service, is defined by the ISO 16023-2000 standard. Unlike the others, it has a set size, which limits the number of characters to be encoded. Indeed, the maximum number of characters is 93 alphanumeric characters or 138 numeric characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of encoding: &lt;br /&gt;
*The first only encodes a string of characters containing data according to a conventional type of encoding and a standard type of error detection/correction. &lt;br /&gt;
*The second type encodes three other fields stored in three of M-Designer's memory spaces, in addition to the string of data. These fields are: the country encoded using 3 digits in accordance with the ISO 3166 standard (called MAP_countr), the postal code encoded using 6 characters (MAP_zipcod) and finally a type of service using 3 digits (MAP_servic). These three fields are encoded using an extended error correction mode contrary to the string of data whose correction mode is standard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available advanced options: &lt;br /&gt;
•	Barcode width: Value between 1 and 15 specifying the size of the barcode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Automating===&lt;br /&gt;
The automating of M-Designer allows you to create image files corresponding to the preview of a project as well as generate a project or an association of projects. All this can be done from the command line, in hidden or non-hidden mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The idea is to build the command with a .BAT file or a remote command, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;InFile&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: .PAG or .XML file to be modelled&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;OutFile&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Output image file&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ProjectFile&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Project to be opened (.MPP)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ProjectAsso&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Project association to be generated (.MPA)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MPIFile&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: .MPI file to be opened (MAP tab)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MPWFile&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: .MPW file to be opened (DRAW tab)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Hide&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: To launch M-Designer in hidden mode&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Colour&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Use of color or not to create the image&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rotation&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Rotation angle of the image (default: 0)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Resolution&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Image resolution (default: 300)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Specimen&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Adding a text above the image (text to be specified in the argument)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Mode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Choose SPOOL or XML mode (default: SPOOL)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Generate&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: To start generating the project indicated in the argument&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Lang&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Generation language (default: PCL5) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*0: PCL5&lt;br /&gt;
*1: PCL5 OPTIMISED&lt;br /&gt;
*2: PCL5 IMAGE&lt;br /&gt;
*3: AFPDS&lt;br /&gt;
*4: PDF (Projects must be associated for generating in PDF)&lt;br /&gt;
*5: ZEBRA&lt;br /&gt;
*6: DPL&lt;br /&gt;
*7: IGP&lt;br /&gt;
*8: TEC&lt;br /&gt;
*9: IPL&lt;br /&gt;
*10: F+D&lt;br /&gt;
*11: EPL&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SubLang: Generation sub-language (default: 0). Depends on the generation language&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*PCL5, PCL5 OPTIMISED, PCL5 IMAGE:&lt;br /&gt;
*0 = PCL5e (default)&lt;br /&gt;
*1 = PCL5&lt;br /&gt;
*AFPDS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0 = 4028 Compatible&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 = Resident Font&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 = Font Collection (default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*DPL:&lt;br /&gt;
0 = Macro Standard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 = Send Standard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 = Macro Mainframe (default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 = Send Mainframe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*IPL:&lt;br /&gt;
0 = Bitmap Font&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 = True Type Font (default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;GenColour&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Color generation (= 1) or black and white (= 0) (default: 0)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Active&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Active mode, only for AFPDS language (0 or 1) (default: 0)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Res&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Resolution of the generation. Depends on the language of generation:&lt;br /&gt;
PCL5, PCL5 OPTIMISED, PCL5 IMAGE: 300 or 600 (default: 300)&lt;br /&gt;
AFPDS: 240, 300 or 600 (default: 240)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PDF: 300 or 600 (default: 300)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZEBRA: 152, 203, 300 or 600 (default: 152)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DPL: 152, 203, 300 or 600 (default: 152)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IGP: 72, 152, 203, 300 or 600 (default: 72)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TEC: 203 or 300 (default: 203)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPL: 203 or 300 (default: 203)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
F+D: 203 or 300 (default: 203)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EPL: 203 or 300 (default: 203)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Overlay&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Generate page background (0 or 1) (default: 1)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Font&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Generate font (0 or 1) (default: 1)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FtpUse&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: 0 = does not use FTP; 1 = uses FTP&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FtpFolder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: FTP directory&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FtpLogin&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: FTP login&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FtpPassword&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: FTP password&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;FtpIPAddress&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: IP address of the server&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ShareFolder&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Share directory&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ServerName&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Name of the server (description)&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rename&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: changes the FORMAT and SEQUENCE of the project using its name. Example: Facture00010.mpp&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MVM&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Opens M-Designer in MappingVersionManager mode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example 1: Project generated in PCL, in color and 300 dpi&lt;br /&gt;
C:\Mapping\M-Designer\M-Designer.exe &amp;quot;-Hide&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-ProjectFile:C:\Mapping\M-Processing_Server \Import\docpc\test.mpp&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Generate&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Lang:0&amp;quot; &amp;quot;- GenColor:1&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Res:300&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the &amp;quot;-Generate&amp;quot; setting (indicating a project generation), the &amp;quot;-ProjectFile: &amp;quot; or &amp;quot;-ProjectAsso: &amp;quot; setting must be present in order to identify the project to be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
If the &amp;quot;-ProjectFile: &amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-ProjectAsso: &amp;quot; settings are present, the project will take priority for the generation and the association of projects will be ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example 2: creating a colour BMP image, with a 90° rotation, in 203 dpi and with the word SPECIMEN overlaid&lt;br /&gt;
C:\Mapping\M-Designer\M-Designer.exe &amp;quot;-InFile:c:\test.xml&amp;quot; &amp;quot;- OutFile:c:\image.bmp&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-ProjectFile:C:\ Mapping\M-Processing_Server \Import\docpc\test.mpp&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Hide&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Rotation:90&amp;quot; &amp;quot;- Resolution:203&amp;quot; “-Color” &amp;quot;-Mode:XML&amp;quot; &amp;quot;-Specimen:SPECIMEN&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to create an image, the &amp;quot;-InFile &amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-ProjectFile&amp;quot; settings are mandatory. &lt;br /&gt;
If &amp;quot;-Outfile&amp;quot; is absent, the output file takes the name of the input file with the extension .BMP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default mode is SPOOL. If the input file is an XML file, you have two specify the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Replacing characters===&lt;br /&gt;
The objective is to explain how to replace a string of characters in the input file by another string of characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The operating principle involves using a text file as a conversion chart between the value to be replaced and the new value. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is required in order to use the conversion chart:&lt;br /&gt;
*Define the zone using the Type mode = Text / Sub-type mode = Substitution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finish and generate the template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;ReplaceValue.txt&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; file in a text editor (like Notepad, but not Word). The syntax of the file is as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
Value to be replaced	Tab 	 New Value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, the &amp;quot;]&amp;quot; character will be replaced by the &amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot; character and &amp;quot;Nom&amp;quot; will be replaced by &amp;quot;Name&amp;quot; (if the value to be replaced is located in a Text\Substitution type zone).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save the ReplaceValue.txt file in the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;lgobitmap&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; sub-directory of Mapping (\home\mapping\lgobitmap by default on iSeries and /apps/mapping/import/lgobitmap on Unix)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Generate a template in PDF (by association of projects)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This method by &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Association of projects&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is required to generate a template in PDF language but it can also be used for all the other languages supported by M-Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To create an association of projects, simply click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;File &amp;gt; Association of projects &amp;gt; New &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A window to select the projects concerned opens:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
You must select the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;.MPP&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; files that you want to associate.&lt;br /&gt;
Then click the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Save&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; button to save your project association. The file will have the .MPA extension.&lt;br /&gt;
Once the file has been saved, click &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Generate&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The generation by association of projects is complete. All that remains is to import your templates to your production system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Draw a table===&lt;br /&gt;
====Static table====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to create a perfectly drawn and aligned table without using the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Static Table&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; tool of the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fixed layout &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; view, you need to complete the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
start by drawing the rectangular outline of the table,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
draw the vertical lines to define the columns,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
draw the horizontal lines needed to create any rows you may require (column headers for example),&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
finally select all the elements of the table and press the lowercase &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; key on the keyboard:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Comment:&lt;br /&gt;
This design aid can be used in the  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fixed layout &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; view and  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Dynamic layout &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; view of the project. In the Dynamic view, you can draw a table inside a Group and place, for example, an execution condition on a horizontal line to dynamically draw a line for each new row of data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Dynamic table====&lt;br /&gt;
As announced in the options available for a group (see paragraph 6.4.b.2. Create a fixed group), the table mode allows to zones of a group to act as the table cells. The zones of the same line therefore find themselves automatically pasted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remark:&lt;br /&gt;
Resize or move a zone has an impact on the adjacent zones size and positioning.&lt;br /&gt;
The group's lines (or conditions) are visually represented in the design window. The zones are, on the other hand, vertically distributed according to their line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Construction of a graph===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Map part:&lt;br /&gt;
Create a graph from the tab Graph:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name it (here “GRAPH1”):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
From there, the complex graph can be constructed in two different ways, presented below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====By selecting zones one by one====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select, in the spool, the zones that will be used in the graph,&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, for each defined zone:&lt;br /&gt;
*Name them all with the same name as the graph (here it will be “GRAPH1”)&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter the Type = “GRAPH”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the utility of the area in the graph, select the corresponding &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Sub-type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in the proposed list:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to the Graph &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;click Edition&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 *Set your chart by choosing from the tabs:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the graphic: which will be included in the names of the zones,&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Number of zones&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: that will compose the chart,&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Graph type&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Pie, Bar, Line chart&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NB: For the graph type = &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Bar chart&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;, it is possible to define the spacing between the bars on the right and on the left (in%). This option can be used, for example, to overlay two graphs by playing on the bar spacing of each graph.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Properties&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: allows to choose the fill, the border, the width of the outline, the fill type, ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Positioning&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: allows to place the titles (X, Y, of the graph) and the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;legend&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; , to resize the graph according to the preferences of the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NB: The print area of the graph is the area delimited by the large rectangle so everything that will not be in it will not be visible when printing (e.g.: the &amp;quot;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Legend&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;quot; area is outside the rectangle in the first image below while it is in in the second).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-	The Legend is constructed by selecting the zones in the spool that will serve as legend for the chosen attributes. As with any other data, you must name the field as the name of the graph and enter the properties of the field with Type = &amp;quot;Graphic&amp;quot; and Sub-type = &amp;quot;Data of the legend&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NB: Be attentive to respect the order of the data selection by defining the zones that will serve to the legend because they will follow the same order as the one of the attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====By creating a group====&lt;br /&gt;
The principle is the same as that described above except that the data is grouped into a group. This option is possible if the data of the chart follow in the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a group that will define the data to be taken into account for the construction of the graph and to deposit the selected zones that contain data, titles, legend …&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name the zone(s) with the same name as the graph and enter its properties with Type = “Graph” and the Sub-type according to the role of the zone (title, data, legend …).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The remainder of the construction of the graph is the same as that described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculation in a group===&lt;br /&gt;
To simplify the calculation management into a group and especially the management of “total” and “subtotal”, a tool has been integrated within M-Designer. It allows to perform processing on an input XML file using scripts. These scripts are executed before the application of the template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding of the calculation into a group through this tool is by the “addline” script function. The addline function adds a line to a group specifying a sequence of pairs “field name / value” to add. &lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the “string” type parameters must be surrounded by double quotes and field names in formulas by single quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Syntax:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
addline(group name, line name, page break type line, name of the first field, value of the first field, pre-calculation of the first field, name of the second field, value of the second field, pre-calculation of the second field, etc…);&lt;br /&gt;
The addline function starts by the following arguments:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Group name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: contains group name where the line should be added.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Line name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: line name to add.&lt;br /&gt;
Then, it consists of an unlimited sequence of field / value pairs:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Field name&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: field name that has the line&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Field value&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: field value possessed by the line&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Yes&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: The calculation is resolved during the script execution, taking into account all the XML values. &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;No&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: The calculation is solved when using the value in a template and therefore takes into account only the values in the current page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the following script adds a line to the group named “group”:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
addline(&amp;quot;group&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;line&amp;quot;,yes,&amp;quot;field1&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;value1&amp;quot;,no,&amp;quot;field2&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;value2&amp;quot;,no);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;groupe&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
…&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;ligne&amp;quot; pagebreak=”1”&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
	&amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;champ1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;valeur1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;champ2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;valeur2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the field value contains a calculation then the syntax is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SUM(operation)]] for calculating a sum over all the groups of lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[AVG(operation)]] for calculating an average over all the groups of lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, “operation” is a mathematical calculation using field names in lines of the group. Field names must be surrounded by single quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5.5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For adding a total line of this group, use this script:&lt;br /&gt;
 addline(&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;LigneTotal&amp;quot;,no &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;total&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;total = [[SUM('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;quot;, yes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;moyenne&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;moyenne = [[AVG('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;quot;, yes&lt;br /&gt;
); &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This script adds a total line at the end of the group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
…&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5.5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;LigneTotal&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;total&amp;quot;&amp;gt;total = 99.5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;moyenne&amp;quot;&amp;gt;moyenne = 24.875&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Pre-calculation option to “no” allows to not execute calculations when adding the line to the group but when executed by the template. &lt;br /&gt;
The advantage of this option is to perform calculations only with the written data on the current page, thus allowing the writing of subtotals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a subtotal line to the previous group, use this script:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
addline(&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;LineSubtotal&amp;quot;,yes,&amp;quot;subtotal&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;sous-total = [[SUM('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;quot;,no);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This script adds a total line at the end of the group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
…&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5.5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;LineSubtotal&amp;quot; pagebreak=”1”&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;subtotal&amp;quot;&amp;gt;sous-total = [[SUM('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;c&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pagination management===&lt;br /&gt;
Information writing management of the pagination such as the total number of page, the number of the batch and the number of pages in the batch is possible in M-Designer through the following two options:&lt;br /&gt;
====Batch breaking====&lt;br /&gt;
The “Batch breaking” option is in the Properties of the template (see paragraph 4.2.Creating a project). It defines a Metadata type zone which will be used to group the pages of the final document in batch.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
During page processing:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If the Metadata type zone retrieves a new value then a new batch will be created. The current page will belong to this new batch.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the Metadata type zone retrieves a value already previously recovered, the current page will be moved to the batch corresponding to that value.&lt;br /&gt;
*If no value is recovered by the Metadata type zone, the page remains in the same batch as the previous page.&lt;br /&gt;
The multi-document system of XPS is used to represent the batch, the output file is sorted by sequence (first pages of the first batch and the second pages, etc ...).&lt;br /&gt;
====Replacement variables====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable information writing of pagination, there are “post-treatment” type variables, that is to say they will be replaced by their real value at the printing time.&lt;br /&gt;
These variables can be used into zones or in text blocks:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MAP_TOTAL_PAGE&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = total number of page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MAP_TOTAL_DOC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = total number of batch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;MAP_TOTAL_PAGE_IN_DOC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; = page number in the current batch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The used syntax is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;PST&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: variable name; default value]]&lt;br /&gt;
The “default value” is mandatory and allows to having a text in the page. This temporary text will be replaced by its real value. It is important because it is through this text that the positioning calculations will be. This text must therefore have a number of character at least equal to the maximum value expected by the used variable.&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
[[PST:MAP_TOTAL_PAGE;000]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Displays “000” in the page, but at the printing time this value will be replaced by:&lt;br /&gt;
-	&amp;quot;  5&amp;quot; if there are 5 page in total.&lt;br /&gt;
-	&amp;quot; 10&amp;quot; if there are 10 page in total.&lt;br /&gt;
-	&amp;quot;150&amp;quot; if there are 150 page in total.&lt;br /&gt;
Others syntaxes also exist, accessible during the processing of the page:&lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;VAR:MAP_CURRENT_PAGE&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;]] = current page number &lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;VAR:MAP_CURRENT_DOC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;]] = current batch number (the Metadata zone managing the batch breaking must be defined before using this variable). &lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;VAR:MAP_CURRENT_PAGE_IN_DOC&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;]] = current page number in the current batch.&lt;br /&gt;
And in general:&lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;VAR:variable d’env&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;]] = retrieve the contents of the environment variable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Widows-and-orphans management===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Complex management of widows and orphans is possible through two features: the Entire group and the repetition of XML group.&lt;br /&gt;
====Entire group====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When we use a limit type of page break generation, a new option appears in the group properties: Entire group. This option specifies that the group cannot be cut and it must be printed in full on a single page. If the limit triggers a page break, no line of the group will be printed, the group will be fully processed on the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====XML group repetition====&lt;br /&gt;
The XML group repetition assumes that the group appears several times in the input XML file. This feature is enabled with the parameter &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; in the group properties.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Example: &lt;br /&gt;
In the example below, the group &amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot; appears three times in the XML. By default, the group of the template will retrieve the information from the first appearance of the group in the XML. But if the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; option is checked, the execution of the group will continue on all occurrences.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Description item 1&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Description item 2&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;group name=&amp;quot;invoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;item&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;&amp;gt;item 3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;price&amp;quot;&amp;gt;12&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;quantity&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;line name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;field name=&amp;quot;description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Description item 3&amp;lt;/field&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/line&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The cumulative use of a boundary generating page breaks with the &amp;quot;Entire group&amp;quot; and active repetition allows to manage a complex system of widows and orphans.&lt;br /&gt;
In our example, the lines &amp;quot;item&amp;quot; and the lines &amp;quot;description&amp;quot; cannot be separated by a page break.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=ONYX:9.0:Utilisation:Partie_Dynamique_de_ONYX_Designer&amp;diff=30777</id>
		<title>ONYX:9.0:Utilisation:Partie Dynamique de ONYX Designer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=ONYX:9.0:Utilisation:Partie_Dynamique_de_ONYX_Designer&amp;diff=30777"/>
		<updated>2020-03-17T11:10:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Partie Dynamique (Onglet Map)= &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Définition== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La partie ''Map'' d’un projet correspond à la partie dynamique des éditions dépendant de chaque flux de données traité par ce modèle. Les éléments principaux pouvant être placés dans cette partie sont, tout d’abord, les informations imprimables des fichiers de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’élaboration de cette partie se fera en sélectionnant l’onglet '''Map R''' ('''Map V''' pour le verso du document). Dans cette vue de conception, les éléments de la partie ''Draw'' apparaissent en filigrane pour faciliter les positionnements des données à imprimer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notion de &amp;amp;quot;Fichier Spool&amp;amp;quot;== &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour repérer et identifier les données à imprimer, la conception d’un projet Designer s’appuie sur un fichier exemple. Ce fichier exemple est l’image du ''spool'' de production à mettre en forme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Deux types de fichiers de données sont pris en charge nativement dans Designer : des fichiers textes paginés et des fichiers ''XML'' au format Mapping. Le paramétrage du type de fichier en entrée est fait dans les propriétés du projet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les fichiers traités par Designer peuvent avoir une extension ''.PAG'' ou ''.TXT''. Historiquement, les ''fichiers textes'' ont pour extension ''.PAG'' car ils doivent être paginés. Un fichier non paginé peut être paginé grâce à la commande ''MAPPAGIFS'' depuis Onyx Server où un argument précisant le nombre de lignes par page (&amp;amp;quot;Overflow&amp;amp;quot;) sera notamment précisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les ''fichiers XML'' doivent respecter une syntaxe prédéfinie pour être correctement exploitables dans l’application (voir chapitre [[#mode-xml-syntaxe-et-spécifications|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6.3 Mode XML : syntaxe et spécifications&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour ouvrir et afficher un fichier d’exemple dans Designer, la vue spool doit être activée dans le menu ''Affichage'' :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image33.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour charger le fichier spool dans l’application, dans l’onglet ''Accueil'', il faut cliquer sur [[File:onyxdesigner-image34.png]] et sélectionner le fichier à charger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La vue ''Spool'' affiche alors les données à mettre en forme :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image35.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image36.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour aider l’utilisateur dans la conception de son projet, il est possible de pré-visualiser le résultat sans avoir à imprimer le document. Pour cela, il suffit de cliquer simplement sur le bouton ''Aperçu'' dans le menu ''Accueil''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mode XML : syntaxe et spécifications== &amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
En ''mode XML'', les principes de conceptions sont les mêmes et s’appuient sur un fichier d’exemple chargé dans l’application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Comme décrit dans le paragraphe [[#création-dun-projet-1|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4.2. Création d’un projet&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]], pour charger un document .xml, il ne faut surtout pas oublier d’aller dans les '''Propriétés''' du projet et vérifier que dans '''Paramètres''' &amp;amp;gt; '''Mode''' = '''XML'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image37.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La ''vue Spool'' s’appelle alors '''Vue XML''' et présente le contenu du fichier sous forme d’arborescence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image38.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Structure de données=== &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les fichiers ''XML'' nativement pris en charge par Designer doivent respecter un schéma et une syntaxe prédéfinis dont voici une illustration :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les balises '''&amp;amp;lt;page name=&amp;amp;quot;...&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt; … &amp;amp;lt;/page&amp;amp;gt;''' permettent de délimiter les pages du document. Dans l’exemple précédent, il n’y a qu’une page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Les balises '''&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;...&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;value1&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;''' représentent une information unitaire (l’équivalent des ''zones'' dans Designer).&lt;br /&gt;
*Les balises '''&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;...&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt; … &amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;''' désignent un certain nombre de lignes contenant des zones, comme un ''groupe'' dans Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
*Les balises '''&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;…&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt; … &amp;amp;lt;line&amp;amp;gt;''' représentent les lignes à l’intérieur de ces groupes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
En procédant par analogie avec une facture papier :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''&amp;amp;lt;page name=&amp;amp;quot;...&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt; … &amp;amp;lt;/page&amp;amp;gt;''' représente les pages de la facture.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;...&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt; … &amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;''' représente la délimitation du corps de la facture (de sa première ligne à sa dernière ligne).&lt;br /&gt;
*'''&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;…&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt; … &amp;amp;lt;line&amp;amp;gt;''' décrit le contenu de chaque ligne du corps de la facture.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;...&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;value1&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;''' peut représenter deux possibilités :&lt;br /&gt;
**Si cette balise est &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;en dehors&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d’un groupe, il s’agit d’une information unitaire dans la facture. Dans ce cas, '''value1''' représente le n° de facture dans l’entête par exemple, ou le n° de client, le type de facture, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
**Si elle se trouve &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;à l’intérieur&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la définition d’un groupe, '''value1''' désigne la valeur de la zone dans la ligne. Par exemple, le code produit, désignation, prix, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ONYX:9.0:Utilisation:Designer_XML_Schema_Definition_(XSD)|Accès au XSD complet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spécifications du schéma XML=== &amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les spécifications attendues par Designer sont les suivantes :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;L’entête XML doit préciser l’'''encodage''' du fichier.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Exemple&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; : &amp;amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;amp;quot;1.0&amp;amp;quot; ''encoding=&amp;amp;quot;'''UTF-16'''&amp;amp;quot;'' standalone=&amp;amp;quot;yes&amp;amp;quot; ?&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;La balise racine des données XML doit s’appeler '''''doc'''''.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Toutes les balises mentionnées ci-après doivent avoir au moins un attribut nommé '''''name'''''. C’est par cet attribut que les informations seront identifiées, récupérées et mises en forme par l’application.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Les noms des balises et des attributs sont '''sensibles à la casse''' et doivent être écrits en lettres '''minuscules'''.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Pour être accessibles par l’application, les données doivent être localisées dans des pages entre les balises &amp;amp;lt;'''page''' name=&amp;amp;quot;…&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt; et &amp;amp;lt;/page&amp;amp;gt;. Un même document peut contenir plusieurs pages.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;A l’intérieur d’une page, les données sont ensuite organisées par champs unitaires (balise &amp;amp;lt;'''field''' name=&amp;amp;quot;…&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;) ou par groupes d’informations (balise &amp;amp;lt;'''group''' name=&amp;amp;quot;…&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Les groupes d’informations sont composés de lignes (balise &amp;amp;lt;'''line''' name=&amp;amp;quot;…&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Les lignes contiennent des informations unitaires (balise &amp;amp;lt;'''field''' name=&amp;amp;quot;…&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Voici un exemple de fichier XML :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image40.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Des données XML peuvent se situer en dehors d’une page comme des informations liées au document dans son ensemble et non à une page en particulier. Elles ne seront, cependant, pas visibles par l’application M-Designer et donc non utilisables pour la conception du document. Elles pourront en revanche être utilisées dans le moteur M-Processing Server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Vue XML dans Designer=== &amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image41.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le chargement d’un fichier d’exemple XML dans Designer se fait de la même manière qu’un fichier texte. Dans la '''vue XML''', la présentation des données apparait sous forme d'une liste d'éléments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rupture de page sur valeur d'un champ XML=== &amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans les '''Propriétés''' d’un groupe, la génération d’un saut de page peut à présent se déclencher sur le changement de valeur d’un champ XML.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;groupe&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;ligne&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;id&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;1&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;data&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt; data &amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;ligne&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;id&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;1&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;data&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt; data &amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;ligne&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;id&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;2&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;data&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt; data &amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;ligne&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;id&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;2&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;data&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt; data &amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;…&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans cet exemple, si le champ utilisé pour générer un saut de page est le champ &amp;amp;quot;'''''id'''''&amp;amp;quot;, un saut de page sera alors généré après l’exécution de la deuxième ligne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans l’interface, le paramètre « '''Saut de page''' » d’un groupe possède plusieurs choix :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image42.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image43.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image44.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image45.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Aucun''' : le groupe ne génère aucun saut de page.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Limite ''': le groupe déclenche un saut de page sur une limite de positionnement.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Champ XML ''': le groupe déclenche un saut de page sur changement de la valeur d’un champ XML.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Champ XML et Limite''' : le groupe déclenche un saut de page sur changement de la valeur d’un champ XML et sur une limite de positionnement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:49--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La gestion de la reprise d’en-têtes, lors de la génération de sauts de page automatiques, est possible grâce aux options « '''En-tête''' » et « '''Dernier en-tête''' » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:50--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image46.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:51--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''En-tête''' : permet de choisir le nom de la ligne du fichier XML servant d’en-tête.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Dernier en-tête''' : si cochée, cette option permet de ne conserver que le dernier en-tête. La case est cochée par défaut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:52--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la génération d’un saut de page, le dernier en-tête (ou tous les en-têtes précédents, si l’option est décochée) sont repris en début de la nouvelle page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:53--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si dans le XML deux lignes d’en-tête se suivent, elles sont alors considérées comme un seul en-tête.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:54--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si un saut de page se déclenche juste après une ligne d’en-tête, celle-ci n’est pas imprimée et est reporté sur la page suivante.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Éditer une liste variable d’éléments sous forme de tableau=== &amp;lt;!--T:55--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:56--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour pouvoir afficher une liste d’éléments présents dans un groupe XML sous forme de tableau, il faut passer par l’outil de scripts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:57--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La fonction '''rowtotable''' permet de réorganiser les lignes d’un groupe de manière à obtenir une répartition horizontale des éléments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:58--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Syntaxe&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;rowtotable(nom du groupe, nombre maximal de colonne);&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:59--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La fonction '''rowtotable''' possède deux paramètres :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:60--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Nom du groupe''' : Contient le nom du groupe devant être réorganisé en tableau, entouré de '''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;doubles guillemets&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Nombre maximum de colonne''' : Nombre maximum de colonne du tableau.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:61--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remarque :''' Toutes les lignes du groupe doivent avoir le même nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:62--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Prenons l’exemple de ce groupe :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:63--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;invoice&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 1&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 2&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 3&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 4&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 5&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 6&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 7&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 8&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:64--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour réorganiser ce groupe sous la forme d’un tableau de trois colonnes, il faut utiliser le script suivant :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:65--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;rowtotable(&amp;amp;quot;invoice&amp;amp;quot;,3);&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:66--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ce script aura pour effet de modifier le groupe qui devient alors :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:67--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;invoice&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name'''_1'''&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 1&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name'''_2'''&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 2&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name'''_3'''&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 3&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name'''_1'''&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 4&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name'''_2'''&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 5&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name'''_3'''&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 6&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name'''_1'''&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 7&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name'''_2'''&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 8&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Eléments Dynamiques== &amp;lt;!--T:68--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:69--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cette partie de la documentation présente les éléments de base pouvant être ajoutés dans la partie dynamique d’un projet ce qui permet une prise en main des fonctionnalités principales de l’application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Zone=== &amp;lt;!--T:70--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Définition==== &amp;lt;!--T:71--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:72--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Une '''zone''' est l’élément principal qui permet de récupérer des informations dans les données en entrée afin de les positionner et de les mettre en forme dans le document graphique final.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:73--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
En ''mode texte'', l’information est identifiée par trois données :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:74--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*un numéro de ligne,&lt;br /&gt;
*un numéro de colonne&lt;br /&gt;
*une longueur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:75--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
En ''mode XML'', elle est identifiée par le nom du champ XML (balise field).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:76--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Une '''zone''' ne peut lire qu’une seule ligne à la fois.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:77--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans l’espace de conception, elle est représentée de deux façons :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:78--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*La '''zone''' est vide, aucune donnée ne lui est associée : une icône apparait dans le coin supérieur droit de celle-ci.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:79--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image47.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:80--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*La '''zone''' est associée à une donnée, elle apparait sans icône.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image48.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Une '''zone''' est identifiée par son ''nom'', défini dans la fenêtre des propriétés (plus de détails dans [[#créer-une-zone|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;a.2 Créer une zone&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]]).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Créer une zone==== &amp;lt;!--T:81--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:82--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour créer une '''zone''', deux méthodes sont possibles :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:83--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Sélectionner l’icône correspondante et son type dans l’onglet ''Donnée'' puis cliquer (sans relâcher) à l’endroit où cet élément doit être positionné. Cette méthode crée une '''zone''' vide. Pour lier la '''zone''' à une donnée du fichier source il suffit de sélectionner la donnée dans la ''vue Spool'' (voir la deuxième méthode ci-dessous) et de la ''glisser-déposer'' dans la zone précédemment crée en maintenant la touche '''Ctrl''' appuyée.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:onyxdesigner-image49.png]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Sélectionner directement les données à récupérer dans la ''vue Spool'' et utiliser le ''glisser-déposer'' à l'endroit désiré sur l'espace de conception pour créer automatiquement une zone liée aux données sélectionnées.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:onyxdesigner-image50.png]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Une fois la zone créée, sélectionnez celle-ci et affichez la ''vue des Propriétés'' pour renseigner ses informations :&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:onyxdesigner-image51.png]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;'''Nom''' :&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;''Nom'' (de la zone) : information interne à Designer, permettant d’identifier les différents objets dans le projet. Ce champ est vide lors d'une création de zone à vide et vaut la valeur de la donnée lors d'une création de zone à partir de la ''vue Spool.''&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;''Label av''/''Label ap'' : possibilités d’ajouter du texte avant et/ou après l’information récupérée.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;'''Position''' :&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Identification de la position de l'information dans le spool de données : colonne, longueur, ligne de début.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Permet également d'extraire une certaine quantité d'information en mode XML.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;'''Position dans le document''' :&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Permet de modifier le positionnement de la zone dans la page.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;'''Type de données''' :&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Permet de définir comment l'application Designer doit traiter l'information récupérée (voir [[#type-de-zones|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;a.3 Types de zones&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']]).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;'''Police''' :&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Permet de paramétrer toutes les options de mise en forme de l'information : police, taille, couleur, cadrage, orientation, etc.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Type de zones==== &amp;lt;!--T:84--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:85--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’application Designer propose diverses options de traitement de l’information selon le type de données à traiter :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:86--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Texte''' : permet d’imprimer du texte simple.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Normal'' : recopie exactement les valeurs se trouvant aux positions définies par la zone qu'il s'agisse de lettres, de chiffres ou de blancs.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Optimisé'' : recopie les caractères se trouvant à ces positions excepté les blancs au début et à la fin de ces positions. Ainsi, le cadrage à gauche, ou à droite est toujours respecté. Il n'y a pas de décalage dû à la présence de blancs dans le spool.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Substitution'' : permet de remplacer une valeur du spool par une autre stockée dans un fichier appelé replacevalue.txt. Par défaut, ce fichier se trouve à l'état vierge dans le dossier d'installation de M-Designer. Pour faire fonctionner les substitutions, il faut le placer dans le dossier '''lgobitmap''' et il doit contenir les '''valeurs à remplacer''' suivies des '''valeurs de remplacement''' séparées par une '''tabulation.''' Ce sous-type est plus détaillé dans le paragraphe &lt;br /&gt;
:: {{warning}} '''Attention:''' il est impératifs que le fichier replacevalue.txt ai le même encodage que le projet Onyx Designer. Par exemple, replaceValue.txt doit être unicode si le projet est unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#_Remplacement_de_caractère|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8.3. Remplacement de caractère&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']].&lt;br /&gt;
**''Translate'' : permet de substituer une valeur par son équivalent traduit dans une autre langue. On utilise au préalable une zone de type '''Outils''' / ''Set Lang'' pour définir le fichier qui contient les traductions. Pour chaque zone '''Texte''' / ''Translate'' définie dans la maquette, le programme cherche l'entrée correspondante à la valeur de la zone dans le fichier qui contient les traductions. Celui-ci doit se trouver dans le dossier ''lgobitmap'' et son nom doit commencer par « '''Translate_''' ».&lt;br /&gt;
**''Compressé'' : zone affichant le texte récupéré dans l’espace alloué. Le texte occupe la largeur de la zone et adapte la taille de police entre un maximum et un minimum afin que le texte soit affiché complètement dans cet espace alloué. Si la taille de police minimum ne permet toujours pas d’afficher le texte complet, celui-ci est tronqué et est suivi de « … ».&lt;br /&gt;
**''Tronqué'' : zone affichant le texte récupéré dans l’espace alloué par la largeur de zone. Si le texte ne peut être complètement affiché, il est tronqué suivi de « … ».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:87--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Code barre''' : permet d’encoder et d’imprimer des codes-barres. La liste des codes à barres disponible est détaillée chapitre ''[[#code-à-barre|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8.1 Code à barre&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:88--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Outils ''': permet d’insérer un numéro de page, des images, … mais aussi d’afficher le nombre total de pages, de pages dans le lot en cours, …&lt;br /&gt;
**''N° Page'' : permet d'imprimer le numéro de la page éditée. Ce numéro n'est pas forcément le même que le numéro de page du spool initial. En effet, si M-Processing Server est conditionné afin d'exclure certaines pages, le nombre de pages éditées n'est pas forcément le même que le nombre de pages du spool d'origine.&lt;br /&gt;
**''N° Lot '': permet d’afficher le numéro du lot.&lt;br /&gt;
**''N° Page'' ''(Lot)'' : permet d’afficher le numéro de la page dans le lot.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Nombre total de pages'' : permet d’afficher le nombre total de pages dans le document entier.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Nombre total de lots'' : permet d’afficher le nombre total de lots dans le document entier.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Nombre total de pages (Lot)'' : permet d’afficher le nombre total de pages dans le lot.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Remplacement spécifique'' : remplace une valeur présente dans le spool traité par une autre valeur récupérée dans un fichier. Par exemple, vous pouvez remplacer le numéro de client qui apparaît dans le spool par le nom de ce client que vous récupérez dans un fichier base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Image'' : imprime une image différente en fonction d'une valeur du spool.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Export'' : ce type de zone permet de récupérer une information du spool et de l'exporter vers un fichier physique.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Rempl. Fichier'' : récupère du texte dans un fichier. Le nom de la zone doit correspondre au nom du fichier. Celui-ci doit se trouver dans le dossier ''lgobitmap'' et s’appeler ''data_NOMDELAZONE.txt'' (où NOMDELAZONE est le nom réel de la zone). Les paramètres de ligne et longueur de la zone indiquent la ligne de texte et la longueur du texte à récupérer.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Input Text'' : permet de créer champs de saisie en interactif pour concevoir des formulaires SOAP au format PDF ou HTML. Lorsque l'utilisateur ouvre le formulaire ainsi généré dans Adobe Reader ou un navigateur internet, celui-ci peut remplir les champs de saisie et envoyer les données sur une URL M-Processing Server dans un point d’entrée Web en cliquant sur le bouton SUBMIT, celui-ci étant en réalité une zone '''Outils /''' ''Input Text'' appelée '''SUBMIT''' (nom système).&lt;br /&gt;
**''HyperLink'' : ajoute un lien URL.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Set Lang'' : permet de spécifier le fichier contenant les traductions. Celui-ci doit se trouver dans le dossier ''lgobitmap'' et son nom doit commencer par Translate_. Cette zone particulière ne s’imprime pas dans le document final, elle n’est visible ni à la visualisation ni au re-maquettage. Le nom de cette zone n’est pas très important, en revanche elle doit être déclarée avant toute autre zone Designer nécessitant une traduction. Ensuite, pour chaque zone de type '''Texte''' / ''Translate'' définie dans la maquette, le programme cherchera l'entrée correspondante à la valeur de la zone dans le fichier qui contient les traductions.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Message XPS'' : permet d’insérer dans la page en cours un fichier XPS. La zone est en fait un lien vers un fichier XPS présent sur le serveur M-Processing Server. Ce fichier ne doit contenir qu’une seule page et se trouver dans le répertoire ''lgobitmap'' (directement ou dans un sous-répertoire). La casse n’a pas d’importance. Si vous modifiez le fichier XPS, cela impactera tous les projets utilisant celui-ci.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Fichier XPS'' : par opposition avec les ''Messages XPS'', les fichiers insérés à l’aide de zones de type ''Fichier XPS'' :&lt;br /&gt;
***peuvent contenir plusieurs pages.&lt;br /&gt;
***sont des pages entières.&lt;br /&gt;
***créent des pages supplémentaires dans le fichier de sortie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:89--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Métadonnée''' : permet d’indexer le document pour l’archivage (zones non imprimées). La longueur des métadonnées est iilimitée.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Index'' : zone index par défaut et utilisable dans les manipulations XPS et dans M-Storage Manager en tant que critère.&lt;br /&gt;
**''MapFrom'' : index réservé pour l’envoi de mail. La valeur portée par cette zone sera utilisée pour définir l’expéditeur du mail.&lt;br /&gt;
**''MapSend'' : index réservé pour l’envoi de mail. La valeur portée par cette zone sera utilisée pour définir le destinataire du mail.&lt;br /&gt;
**''MapCopy'' : index réservé pour l’envoi de mail. La valeur portée par cette zone sera utilisée pour définir le destinataire en copie.&lt;br /&gt;
**''MapBCopy'' : index réservé pour l’envoi de mail. La valeur portée par cette zone sera utilisée pour définir le destinataire en copie cachée.&lt;br /&gt;
**''MapNote'' : index réservé pour l’envoi de mail. La valeur portée par cette zone sera utilisée pour définir le corps du mail.&lt;br /&gt;
**''MapSubject'' : index réservé pour l’envoi de mail. La valeur portée par cette zone sera utilisée pour définir le sujet du mail.&lt;br /&gt;
**''MapOrg'' : index réservé pour l’envoi de fax. La valeur portée par cette zone sera utilisée pour définir l’expéditeur.&lt;br /&gt;
**''MapTo'' : index réservé pour l’envoi de fax. La valeur portée par cette zone sera utilisée pour définir le destinataire.&lt;br /&gt;
**''MapUser'' : index réservé pour l’envoi de fax. La valeur portée par cette zone sera utilisée pour définir le propriétaire.&lt;br /&gt;
**''MapFormat'' : index réservé pour l’envoi de fax. La valeur portée par cette zone sera utilisée pour définir le format du document (.BMP, .JPG, .EXE, .PAG, .PDF, .TIF, .TIF_FAX, .TXT, .XLS).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mémoire ''': permet d’insérer et de mémoriser des informations (non imprimées) qui seront reprises et réutilisées par la suite dans la maquette. (Cf. paragraphe [[#cumul-de-données|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8.1.b. Cumul de données&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']])&lt;br /&gt;
**''Texte'' : mise en mémoire d'une information alphanumérique et suppression des espaces après le texte.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Texte avec espaces'' : mise en mémoire d'une information alphanumérique en conservant les espaces après le texte.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Entier'' : mise en mémoire d'une information numérique de type entier.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Flottant'' : mise en mémoire d'une information numérique de type flottant.&lt;br /&gt;
**''SQL'' : mise en mémoire d’une information alphanumérique retrouvée dans une base de données par l’exécution d’une requête SQL.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Protect SQL'' : mise en mémoire d’une information alphanumérique retrouvée dans une base de données par l’exécution d’une requête SQL protégée.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Calcul Mathématique'' : utilisation des zones mémoire pour effectuer un calcul.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Remplacement Mémoire'' : impression des informations mises en mémoire.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Memory Translate'' : mise en mémoire d’une information alphanumérique, résultat de la traduction automatique de l’information récupérée dans le spool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Graphique''' : permet de générer un graphique à partir de plusieurs données&lt;br /&gt;
**Données du graphique.&lt;br /&gt;
**Données de l'axe X.&lt;br /&gt;
**Données de l'axe Y.&lt;br /&gt;
**Titre du graphique.&lt;br /&gt;
**Titre de l'axe X.&lt;br /&gt;
**Titre de l'axe Y.&lt;br /&gt;
**Données de la légende.&lt;br /&gt;
**Valeur minimum de l'axe Y.&lt;br /&gt;
**Valeur maximum de l'axe Y.&lt;br /&gt;
**Nombre d'intervalles de l'axe Y.&lt;br /&gt;
**Arrondir à n près de l'axe Y.&lt;br /&gt;
**Origine de l'axe Y.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;La construction d’un graphique est détaillée dans le paragraphe [[#construction-dun-graphique|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8.6. Construction d’un graphique&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']].&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Designer a la possibilité de convertir automatiquement les anciens types de graphique en graphiques complexes. Cette fonctionnalité permet de faciliter la conversion d’anciens projets en projets XPS.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:92--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Conversion''' : permet de convertir des données numériques selon les règles de conversion (Euro à Dollar par exemple) définies dans '''Onyx Server''' &amp;amp;gt; '''Gestion des Formats M-Designer''' &amp;amp;gt; '''Gestion des Taux''' (01=E1 ; 02=E2 ; …)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:93--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''XPS PrintTicket''' :&lt;br /&gt;
**''Copy'' : nombre d’exemplaire à imprimer.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Input Bin'' : numéro de bac d’entrée (alimentation de papier sur imprimante).&lt;br /&gt;
**''Output Bin'' : numéro de bac de sortie.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Media Type'' : Type de papier (A4, A5, etc...).&lt;br /&gt;
**''Force Front Side'' : Conditionne le mode Recto, Recto / Verso lors de l’impression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:94--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Commandes''' : permet d’ajouter des données dans le flux d’impression directement en langage d’impression. Tout comme pour les propriétés du projet ''Document'' et ''Page'' (cf. [[#création-dun-projet-1|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4.2. Création d’un projet&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]]), une zone « ''Commandes'' » permet de définir des données en langage imprimante pour les langages suivants : '''PCL5''', '''APFDS''', '''PDF''', '''ZPL''', '''DPL''', '''TEC''', '''IGP''', '''IPL''' et '''EPL'''. Une zone peut contenir des données pour plusieurs langages différents. Lors de la conversion du XPS vers le langage de sortie, la donnée correspondante au langage de sortie sera utilisée.   [[File:onyxdesigner-image52.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;''Langage'' : sélection du langage.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;''Activer'' : Active la zone pour le langage sélectionné.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;''Pré-'' et ''Post-Imprimé''''' :''' Donnée écrite avant et après la donnée récupérée du spool.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;L’écriture de données hexadécimales dans le « ''pré-'' » et « ''post-imprimé'' » est possible en utilisant la syntaxe suivante : '''\x''' suivit de la valeur hexadécimale sur deux caractères.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Un Groupe=== &amp;lt;!--T:95--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Définition==== &amp;lt;!--T:96--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:97--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Un '''groupe''' permet de récupérer plusieurs lignes d’un flux. Il est caractérisé par une ligne de début et une ligne de fin. Sur l’espace de conception, il est représenté en rouge :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:98--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image53.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Un '''groupe''' peut être ''fixe'' (lignes de début et de fin fixes) ou ''variable'' (lignes de début et de fin variables).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Créer un groupe fixe==== &amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:101--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour créer un '''groupe fixe''', les méthodes disponibles sont équivalentes à la création d'une ''zone''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:102--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Créer un '''groupe''' vide à partir du menu ''Ruban'', sélectionner les données du fichier source et de les ''glisser-déposer'' dans le groupe précédemment créé en maintenant la touche '''Ctrl''' enfoncée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:103--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image54.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:104--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image55.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:105--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Sélectionner directement les données dans la ''vue Spool'' et utiliser le ''glisser-déposer'' à l'endroit désiré sur l'espace de conception pour créer automatiquement un groupe lié à la zone de sélection du spool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Une fois le groupe créé, il faut renseigner ses informations dans la ''vue des Propriétés'' :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:107--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image56.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:108--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Nom''' :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:109--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*''Nom'' (du groupe) : information interne à Designer, permettant d’identifier les différents objets dans le projet. Ce champ est vide lors d'une création d'un groupe à vide et vaut la valeur de la première ligne de la sélection de données lors de la création d'un groupe à partir de la ''vue Spool''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:110--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Position dans le document''' :&lt;br /&gt;
**Permet de modifier le positionnement du groupe dans la page.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Position''' :&lt;br /&gt;
**Identification des lignes de début et fin du bloc d’information à récupérer.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Décalage '': position d’impression de la première ligne par rapport au groupe.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Option''' :&lt;br /&gt;
**''Conditions exclusives'' : pour une ligne du groupe, une condition vraie s’exécutera de manière exclusive sans tester les suivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Tableau '': permet aux zones du groupe de se comporter comme les cellules d’un tableau. Les zones d’une même ligne se retrouvent donc automatiquement collées. Redimensionner ou déplacer une zone impacte la taille et le positionnement des zones adjacentes. De plus, les lignes du groupe (ou conditions) sont visuellement représentées dans la fenêtre de conception. Les zones sont, quant à elles, réparties verticalement en fonction de leur ligne. Cette option est détaillée dans le paragraphe [[#dessiner-un-tableau-dynamique|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8.5.b. Dessiner un tableau dynamique&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']].&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Variable''' :&lt;br /&gt;
**Permet de changer le type de groupe : de fixe (les lignes de début et de fin sont statiques) à variable (les lignes de début et de fin sont variables et définies par des conditions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:111--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si l’utilisateur demande un aperçu, aucune information ne sera imprimée. En effet, un '''groupe''' ne définit que des bornes entre lesquelles de l’information doit être récupérée dans le spool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les bornes de la zone de sélection des données étant définies grâce aux champs ''ligne de début'' et ''ligne de fin'' du '''groupe''', il convient maintenant de récupérer les données en créant une ou plusieurs ''Zones'' à l'intérieur du '''groupe'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''En résumé :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*On configure la zone de sélection du bloc de données par la création d'un ''Groupe :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image55.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*On récupère les données à l'intérieur de ce bloc de données par la création d'une ''Zone :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image57.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Nous pouvons alors constater que toutes les lignes de notre bloc de données sont récupérées grâce à l'aperçu ('''Ctrl+w'''). Il est possible de créer plusieurs ''Zones'' issues du bloc de données, de les placer dans le ''groupe'' et de conditionner leur mise en page (voir [[#une-condition|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6.4.c. Une condition&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image61.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Créer un groupe variable==== &amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le principe du '''groupe variable''' est identique au ''groupe fixe'' c’est-à-dire qu’il permet de récupérer plusieurs lignes d’information dans le spool. Lorsque la ligne de début ou la ligne de fin du groupe n'est pas toujours au même endroit dans le spool ou que vous voulez que les informations ne soient pas toujours imprimées au même endroit dans la page, vous devez alors utiliser un groupe variable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:122--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Un '''groupe variable''' utilise une ''condition de début'' et une ''condition de fin''. Le groupe commence à s'exécuter quand une condition est validée et il s'arrête lorsqu'une autre condition est validée ou lorsqu'il a exécuté un certain nombre de lignes. Un groupe variable peut-être exécuté une ou plusieurs fois dans la page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:123--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
De plus, la position des valeurs imprimées par un groupe variable peut être variable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:124--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez définir, par exemple, que les valeurs imprimées par un groupe se positionnent après les valeurs imprimées par un autre groupe. Nous parlerons alors de '''positionnement relatif'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:125--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez aussi définir que le total de la facture s'imprime toujours un centimètre après la dernière ligne de produits (qu'il y ait 5 ou 20 lignes). La position du total facture changera donc en fonction du nombre de lignes de produits que contient cette facture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Un groupe peut être '''variable''' en :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:127--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*''taille'' : les lignes de début et de fin sont déterminées dynamiquement par conditions.&lt;br /&gt;
*''position d’impression'' : les groupes variables peuvent être chainés les uns à la suite des autres, le groupe n+1 commençant à s’imprimer dès que le groupe n est terminé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:128--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces deux types de variable peuvent exister de façon distincte ou conjointe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:129--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour créer un groupe variable, il suffit de cliquer sur l’icône [[File:onyxdesigner-image64.png]] puis de dessiner le groupe sur l’espace de conception.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:130--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La vue ''Propriétés'' s’affiche pour renseigner les informations du groupe :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image65.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:132--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Nom''' :&lt;br /&gt;
**''Nom'' (du groupe) : information interne à Designer, permettant d’identifier les différents objets dans le projet. Ce champ est vide lors d'une création d'un groupe à vide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:133--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Position dans le document''' :&lt;br /&gt;
**Permet de modifier le positionnement du groupe dans la page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:134--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Position''' :&lt;br /&gt;
**''Décalage '': position d’impression de la première ligne par rapport au groupe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:135--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Option''' :&lt;br /&gt;
**''Conditions exclusives'' : pour une ligne du groupe, une condition vraie s’exécutera de manière exclusive sans tester les suivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Répéter'' : si la condition de début apparaît plusieurs fois, le groupe s'exécutera plusieurs fois à condition que la condition de fin ait été validée entre temps.&lt;br /&gt;
**''MapOffice'' : permet de vérifier la conception d’un groupe MapOffice (voir la documentation Connect pour la conception d’un document Office).&lt;br /&gt;
**''Tableau '': permet aux zones du groupe de se comporter comme les cellules d’un tableau. Les zones d’une même ligne se retrouvent donc automatiquement collées. Redimensionner ou déplacer une zone impacte la taille et le positionnement des zones adjacentes. De plus, les lignes du groupe (ou conditions) sont visuellement représentées dans la fenêtre de conception. Les zones sont, quant à elles, réparties verticalement en fonction de leur ligne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:136--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Variable''' :&lt;br /&gt;
**Permet de changer le type de groupe : de fixe (les lignes de début et de fin sont statiques) à variable (les lignes de début et de fin sont variables et définies par des conditions).&lt;br /&gt;
**''Espacement'' : Espacement avant l'impression du groupe.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Type de condition d'arrêt'' : Permet de conditionner la fin de l'exécution du groupe variable.&lt;br /&gt;
**''Groupe précédent'' : Indique après quel ''groupe fixe'' le ''groupe variable'' s'exécute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Une Condition=== &amp;lt;!--T:137--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Condition d'Exécution==== &amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les '''conditions d'exécution''' permettent d'exécuter, ou non, l'objet conditionné en fonction d'une ''valeur dans le spool''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Une condition peut s’appliquer à la fois sur une page, un composant, un groupe, une zone, une ligne ou un rectangle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:141--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si la condition est validée alors l'objet est exécuté. Dans le cas contraire, aucune autre action n'est réalisée. Pour réaliser deux actions différentes en fonction de la présence ou non d'une valeur de spool, il vous faut donc créer deux objets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:142--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Exemple&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; : Vous voulez écrire différemment en noir quand il y a la valeur '''''Facture''''' et en rouge quand il y a la valeur '''''Avoir''''' dans une ligne de spool. Vous créez alors une zone avec une police noire quand il y a '''''Facture''''', et une zone qui utilise une police rouge quand il y a '''''Avoir''''' car la création d’une seule condition dans une même zone : « police noire si '''''Facture''''' et police rouge si '''''Avoir '''''» n’est pas possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:143--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les conditions sont gérées différemment si l'objet est fixe ou s'il appartient à un groupe. En effet, dans un groupe, la condition est nommée et elle est rattachée au groupe. Nous pouvons donc associer plusieurs objets à une même condition sans devoir ressaisir celle-ci à chaque fois.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Condition de début==== &amp;lt;!--T:144--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:145--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La '''condition de début''' détermine la première ligne d'exécution du ''groupe variable''. Le groupe commence à s'exécuter sur la ligne où la condition de début est vraie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:146--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Onyx Server teste la validité de la condition à partir de la première ligne du spool (ligne 1). Dès que la condition est vérifiée, le groupe commence à s'exécuter. Il s'arrête lorsque la ''condition de fin'' est vérifiée à son tour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:147--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est également nécessaire de définir au niveau de la '''condition de début''' si le groupe est imprimé de manière ''fixe'' sur la page ou s'il est imprimé en ''positionnement relatif'' par rapport à un autre groupe. Il est aussi possible de choisir que le groupe s'imprime un centimètre après la fin d'un autre groupe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:148--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si la condition de début de groupe n'est vérifiée sur aucune des lignes du spool, le groupe n'est pas exécuté.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:149--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si la condition de début est vérifiée sur plusieurs lignes du spool, le groupe ne s'exécute qu'une seule fois : à partir de la première ligne où la condition est vérifiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Condition de fin==== &amp;lt;!--T:150--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:151--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La ligne de fin d'un ''groupe variable'' peut être définie de deux manières :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:152--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*nombre de lignes d'exécution,&lt;br /&gt;
*condition de fin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:153--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
En connaissant le nombre de lignes que doit exécuter le groupe variable, Il est alors possible de paramétrer ce nombre en entrée après avoir coché ''Nombre de lignes''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:154--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La condition d'arrêt n'est pas un test de comparaison par rapport à une valeur présente dans le spool mais le nombre de ligne après lesquelles le groupe s'arrête.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:155--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La '''condition de fin''' détermine la dernière ligne d'exécution du ''groupe variable''. Le groupe arrête de s'exécuter sur la ligne où la condition de fin est vraie. De plus, cette ligne peut être ''exclue'' (non exécutée) ou ''incluse'' (exécutée).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Condition Exclusive==== &amp;lt;!--T:156--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:157--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans un groupe, il est possible de gérer plusieurs conditions. Par défaut, il y en a une seule qui est la condition ''Aucune'' et qui s'applique pour toutes les nouvelles zones créées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:158--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Exemple&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:159--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans un groupe contenant des lignes de produit, il peut y avoir des lignes de sous-totaux. Il est possible d’utiliser plusieurs zones pour imprimer ces différents types de ligne (pour mettre les sous-totaux en gras par exemple) grâce à une condition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:160--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ici, il y a donc, à la base, deux conditions : une condition ''Sous-total'' à laquelle est rattachée au moins une zone qui imprime en gras et la condition ''Aucune ''à laquelle est rattachée la zone qui écrit en standard pour les lignes de produit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:161--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si le groupe fonctionne en '''conditions exclusives''', une seule condition est appliquée par ligne, même si plusieurs sont vraies (seule la première créée est appliquée). Les lignes de produit sont imprimées en standard par la zone sous la condition ''Aucune'' et les lignes de sous-totaux sont imprimées en gras par la zone sous la condition &amp;amp;quot;Sous-total&amp;amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:162--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si le groupe fonctionne en '''conditions non exclusives''', toutes les conditions vérifiées sont appliquées par ligne. Dans ce cas, les lignes de sous-totaux sont imprimées deux fois, une fois en gras par la zone sous la condition ''Sous-total'' et une fois en standard par la zone sous la condition ''Aucune''. En effet, la condition ''Aucune'' est toujours vraie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:163--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le fonctionnement en '''conditions non exclusives''' est très peu utilisé. Il oblige à ajouter dans les filtres d'une condition les conditions inverses des autres conditions. Dans ce type de fonctionnement, la condition ''Aucune'' n'est pas utilisée. Il sert uniquement à répéter l'impression d'une information, ou à imprimer sur deux lignes des informations figurant sur une même ligne de spool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:164--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La condition ''Aucune'' ne peut pas être supprimée. Si vous ne souhaitez pas l'utiliser, il faut n'y rattacher aucun objet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Type de comparaison==== &amp;lt;!--T:165--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:166--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors du paramétrage des conditions, vous pouvez tester :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:167--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;L'existence dans la ligne : '''il y a''' dans une ligne ou dans toute la page.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;L'absence dans la ligne : '''il n'y a''' pas dans une ligne ou dans toute la page.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;La supériorité stricte (numérique) : '''&amp;amp;gt;.'''&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;L'égalité ou la supériorité (numérique) : '''=&amp;amp;gt;.'''&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;L'infériorité stricte (numérique) : '''&amp;amp;lt;.'''&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;L'égalité ou l'infériorité (numérique) : '''=&amp;amp;lt;.'''&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Le numéro de la page.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Le numéro de la ligne.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Ces tests permettront à Designer de valider ou pas une condition.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=ONYX:9.0:Utilisation:Fonctionnalit%C3%A9s_avanc%C3%A9es_de_ONYX_Designer&amp;diff=30776</id>
		<title>ONYX:9.0:Utilisation:Fonctionnalités avancées de ONYX Designer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=ONYX:9.0:Utilisation:Fonctionnalit%C3%A9s_avanc%C3%A9es_de_ONYX_Designer&amp;diff=30776"/>
		<updated>2020-03-17T10:49:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Fonctionnalités avancées= &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Code à barre== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Création d’un code à barre=== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour créer un code à barre dans Designer, il suffit de créer une zone de type '''Code Barre''' et de sélectionner le sous-type de code à barre voulu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Les types de codes à barre==== &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''EAN 8'''  Ce code à barre sert à tracer des unités logistiques, à identifier des unités de stockage. La version huit caractères sert au colis de petite taille. Les données doivent contenir '''sept chiffres'''. Le huitième caractère est un caractère de contrôle qui est calculé par l'ordinateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''EAN 13'''  Ce code à barre sert à tracer des unités logistiques, à identifier des unités de stockage. Dans un EAN 13 les deux premiers caractères sont les identifiants du pays d'origine, les 10 autres sont les données et le dernier est le caractère de contrôle qui est calculé par l'ordinateur. Les données doivent donc contenir '''12 chiffres'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;'''Code 39'''&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Ce code à barre sert à coder des données alphanumériques. Il est utilisé dans presque toutes les industries mais pas dans le commerce de détail. Les données peuvent être de longueur variable et peuvent contenir des lettres et des chiffres.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;L'information peut être de '''longueur quelconque''' et contenir des chiffres, des majuscules et les signes « espace », « plus », « moins », « divise », « point », « pourcentage » et « dollar ».&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Code 128'''  Ils permettent de coder des données alphanumériques générales et des données ASCII. Ces codes à barre sont utilisés dans de nombreuses industries pour la gestion de stocks. Les données sont de longueur variable. Le code 128 C doit contenir un nombre pair de caractères (sinon un zéro est ajouté en début de code barre) et ne peut contenir que des chiffres. Code 128 B accepte la totalité des caractères ASCII, alors que le code 128 A n'en accepte qu'une certaine partie.  L’information à coder peut être de '''longueur quelconque''' et propose un choix d'encodage :&lt;br /&gt;
**'''''Optimisé''''' : chiffres, majuscules, minuscules, signes ASCII affichables ou non d’ordre inférieur à 128, et tous signes et caractères de fonction prévus par le Code 128 dans les jeux A, B et C, avec optimisation systématique de longueur&lt;br /&gt;
**'''''N/optimisé''''' : chiffres, majuscules, minuscules, signes ASCII affichables et caractères de fonction prévus par le Code 128 dans le jeu B, sans optimisation de longueur&lt;br /&gt;
**'''''Numérique''''' : chiffres et caractère de fonction prévu par le Code 128 dans le jeu C, avec optimisation systématique de longueur.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Code 2/5 entrelacé'''  Ce codage de nombres privilégie la densité, en réponse à un cahier des charges spécifiques.  La sécurité obtenue par cette symbologie est faible, sauf à employer des moyens optionnels de sécurisation (caractère de contrôle, messages de longueur fixe et contrôlée à la lecture).&lt;br /&gt;
**Bien que le nombre de '''longueur est quelconque''', le principe d'entrelacement impose :&lt;br /&gt;
**Un nombre pair de chiffres lorsque le caractère optionnel de contrôle n'est pas mis en œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
**Un nombre impair de chiffres lorsque le caractère optionnel de contrôle est mis en œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Code 2/5 industriel'''  Cette symbologie ancienne a été très utilisée dans l'industrie, principalement automobile. La sécurité de cette symbologie est faible, sauf mise en œuvre de message de longueur fixe et contrôlée à la lecture.  Les données doivent contenir de '''1 à 32 chiffres'''&lt;br /&gt;
**Codage d'information numérique privilégiant la facilité de mise en œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
**Évolution ou modification d'applications préexistantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''EAN128 Alpha n/optimisé'''  Il s'agit du code GS1-128  Utilisé pour l’identification des unités d’expédition (la palette, éventuellement le carton).&lt;br /&gt;
**Codage d'information alphanumérique,&lt;br /&gt;
**Longueur variable,&lt;br /&gt;
**Auto-contrôlé Continu Bidirectionnel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''EAN128 numérique''' Il s'agit du code GS1-128  Utilisé pour l’identification des unités de d’expédition (la palette, éventuellement le carton).&lt;br /&gt;
**Codage d'information numérique,&lt;br /&gt;
**Longueur variable,&lt;br /&gt;
**Auto-contrôlé Continu Bidirectionnel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''PDF 417'''  Utilisé dans tous secteurs d'activité. Le code PDF417 est le seul code à barres bidimensionnel pouvant être lu à l'aide d'un lecteur linéaire (1D) car, en tant que symbologie linéaire empilée, il partage les caractéristiques des codes à barres linéaires et bidimensionnels.&lt;br /&gt;
**Bidimensionnel,&lt;br /&gt;
**Longueur 2000 Alphanumérique,&lt;br /&gt;
**Huit niveaux de sécurité.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Data Matrix''' Ce code permet d’encoder jusqu’à 2335 caractères. Divers types d’encodage sont disponibles (ASCII, C40, Text et Base 256), le mode par défaut est le mode automatique qui permet d’optimiser l’encodage en permutant d’un mode à l’autre suivant les données. Il existe également un système de détection/correction d’erreur pour réparer toute dégradation.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Postnet'''  Le code à barres '''Postnet''' est utilisé par le service postal des États-Unis. Il est remplacé par l'USPS ou Intelligent Mail barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Planet'''  Le code à barres '''Planet''' est utilisé par le service postal des États-Unis. Il est remplacé par l'USPS ou Intelligent Mail barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''QR Code'''  Il a la particularité de pouvoir encoder un très grand nombre de caractères (7336 en mode numérique). Ce type de code barre est très répandu au Japon. Il existe quatre types d’encodage (alphanumérique, numérique, octets, Kanji) permettant de compresser plus ou moins les données selon leur type. Par défaut, un mode automatique est utilisé afin de choisir l'encodage qui donnera le meilleur taux de compression (basculement de mode en cours de traitement). Des codes de détection/correction d’erreur sont ajoutés aux données, ce qui permet de résister à des dommages sans perte de données. Il existe quatre niveaux de détection/correction d’erreur.'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MaxiCode''' Le code à barres '''MaxiCode''', développé par UPS – United Parcel Service, est défini par la norme ISO 16023-2000. Contrairement aux autres, il a une taille fixe, ce qui limite le nombre de caractères à encoder. En effet, le nombre de caractères maximum est de 93 caractères alphanumériques ou de 138 caractères numériques. Il existe deux types d’encodage. Le premier encode uniquement une chaîne de caractères contenant des données suivant un encodage classique et une détection / correction d’erreur standard. Le second type encode, en plus de la chaîne de données, trois autres champs (le pays codé sur 3 chiffres suivant la norme ISO 3166, le code postal codé sur 6 caractères et enfin un type de service sur 3 chiffres). Ces trois champs sont encodés en utilisant un mode de correction d’erreur étendu contrairement à la chaîne de données dont le mode de correction est classique.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Japan Postal''' Le code à barres '''Japan Postal''' est utilisé par le service postal du Japon.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Codabar (NW7)'''  Au Japon, le '''Codabar Monarch''' est aussi appelé '''NW-7'''. La composition relativement simple du Codabar Monarch fait qu'il est fréquemment utilisé pour coder des numéros de série pour les applications de banques de transfusion sanguine, services de livraisons à domicile, bibliothèques, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''USPS''' '''USPS''' = '''U'''nited '''S'''tates '''P'''ostal '''S'''ervice. Le nom officiel est plutôt '''Intelligent Mail Barcode'''. Il s'agit du nouveau code à barres postal américain qui doit remplacer le Planet et le Postnet. L’Intelligent Mail Barcode est un code à barres à quatre états composé de 65 barres.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''UPC-A'''  Le code à barres '''UPC-A''' est un équivalent américain du code à barres EAN13, dont le premier chiffre serait 0. Il sert principalement à identifier les produits en magasin. Le code à barres UPC-A permet l’encodage de 11 chiffres, un Number System, cinq chiffres pour le Manufacturing Code et cinq chiffres pour le Product Code. Un 12eme chiffre est calculé à partir des onze premiers pour servir de contrôle.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''UPC-E'''  Le code à barres '''UPC-E''' est une version courte du code à barres UPC-A, les dix chiffres du code à barres UPC-A (Manufacturing et Product Code) sont réduits à six chiffres en supprimant des zéros superflus. Avec le Number System et le chiffre de contrôle un code à barres UPC-E se compose donc de huit chiffres. MapDraw permet l’encodage de code à barres UPC-A (11 chiffres) en UPC-E, mais aussi de code réduit de 6, 7 ou 8 chiffres.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''MSI'''  Le code à barres '''MSI''' est utilisé principalement pour le contrôle des stocks, le marquage des conteneurs de stockage et des étagères dans des environnements d'entrepôt. Un code à barres MSI utilise une ou deux clé de contrôle, calculée par modulo 10 ou modulo 11 et permet d’encoder des valeurs numériques de taille indéfinie. Designer permet l’encodage soit avec une clé de contrôle modulo 10, une clé de contrôle modulo 11, deux clés modulo 10, ou encore une modulo 11 suivie d’une clé modulo 10.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====La taille du code à barre==== &amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La taille du code à barre peut être définie de deux manières :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*La première consiste à choisir l'option ''Adapter à la zone'' dans la ''vue des propriétés'', le code à barre s'adaptera alors du mieux possible à la taille de la zone, selon sa norme.&lt;br /&gt;
*Si l'option Adapter à la zone est décochée, la taille du code à barre peut être réglée par la taille de la police de la zone. Cette taille influe sur la largeur et la hauteur du code. La hauteur peut être réduite en réduisant le pourcentage du paramètre Hauteur de la zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cumul de données=== &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible de cumuler, dans un code à barre, des données qui se trouvent à différents endroits dans le spool. Pour cela, il faut créer autant de zones mémoires qu’il y a de données à récupérer dans le spool puis il faut cumuler toutes ces zones dans le label de la zone code à barre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Dans la partie ''Map R'' :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image70.png|cid:image002.png@01D170A6.CBD745A0]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Dans la partie ''Propriétés'' :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image71.png|cid:image003.png@01D170A6.CBD745A0]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Dans cet exemple, les zones mémoires ont pour valeurs:&lt;br /&gt;
**MEM_FACT : 0012601&lt;br /&gt;
**MEM_DTFACT : 14/10/99&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Résultat&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image72.png|cid:image004.png@01D170A7.20EEB820]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est aussi possible d’ajouter du texte qui ne se trouve pas dans le spool grâce à l’utilisation des zones '''Mémoire''' (détaillées dans le paragraphe [[#type-de-zones|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6.4.a.3 Type de zones&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']]) : '''[[MEM1|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[MEM1]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]]TEXT[[[[MEM2|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;MEM2]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;]]'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si vous utilisez des zones de remplacement dans une zone '''Code à Barre''', il faut que la '''longueur de la zone''' '''code à barre''' soit égale à 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cas particulier : EAN128=== &amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’encodage de l’'''EAN128''' est identique à l’encodage du Code128, c’est pour cela que nous utilisons les mêmes polices. La différence est que l’EAN128 est structuré afin de normaliser les informations qu’il contient. Pour cela, entre chaque information est inséré un '''AI''' ('''A'''pplication '''I'''dentifier) qui permet d’identifier la donnée encodée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Structure de l’EAN128&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; : START FNC1 AI DATA (FNC1) AI DATA .... (FNC1) AI DATA CRC END&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''FNC1''' : Caractère séparateur de l’EAN128.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''AI''' : Application Identifier, permet de coder plusieurs informations normalisées dans un même code (date+heure+...).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le premier '''FNC1''' est ajouté automatiquement par Designer. Il est obligatoire, en effet il permet de différencier un code barre EAN128 d’un code barre CODE128.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par contre, les FNC1 suivants sont optionnels. En effet, ils sont obligatoires uniquement lorsque la donnée précédente n’est pas de longueur fixe, dans ce cas, ils permettent de séparer chaque donnée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si vous souhaitez insérer le caractère FNC1, il vous faut mettre dans votre spool la suite de caractères {FNC1}. Ces caractères seront remplacé automatiquement en caractère FCN1 par MAPPING.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ex&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: SPOOL ----&amp;amp;gt; MAPPING&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
AI DATA ----&amp;amp;gt; START FNC1 AI DATA CRC END&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
AI DATA {FNC1} AI DATA ----&amp;amp;gt; START FNC1 AI DATA FNC1 AI DATA CRC END&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si vous ne pouvez pas modifier votre spool pour ajouter les caractères « '''{FNC1} »''' ou si vous souhaitez cumuler plusieurs données qui se trouvent à différents endroits du spool (voir paragraphe précédent : [[#cumul-de-données|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8.1.b. Cumul de données&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']]), vous pouvez utiliser les zones mémoires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cas particulier : code 128=== &amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il y a trois modes d’encodage des codes à barre 128 :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*mode A (alphanumérique),&lt;br /&gt;
*mode B (alphanumérique). Le code 128 Alphanumérique encode en mode B,&lt;br /&gt;
*mode C (numérique). Le code 128 Numérique encode en mode C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le code 128 Alphanumérique Optimisé bascule du mode B au mode C en automatique afin d’optimiser la taille du code à barre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par contre, il est possible que vous ayez à respecter un formatage particulier de votre code à barre, c'est-à-dire respecter un certain nombre de caractères en mode A, B ou C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, le code à barre qui correspond à l’identifiant de suivi des courriers de « La Poste » contient 13 caractères. Les trois premiers doivent être encodés en mode B et les dix derniers en mode C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour réaliser ce code à barre avec Designer, vous devez créer une zone de type « '''Code 128 N/Optimisé''' » puis saisir un masque de formatage dans les options '''Avancées''' de cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:49--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Exemple&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:50--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Soit la donnée suivante'' : 1J45034500751&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:51--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Vous souhaitez encoder :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:52--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''- les trois premiers caractères (1J4) en mode B''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:53--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''- les dix derniers caractères (5034500751) en mode C''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:54--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Votre masque de formatage doit donc être BBBCCCCC.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:55--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Vous pouvez remarquer que bien qu’il y ait dix chiffres à encoder en mode C, on ne précise que cinq ‘C’ dans le masque de formatage. Cela est dû au fait qu’un caractère en mode C encode deux chiffres.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cas particulier : Code Barre 2D=== &amp;lt;!--T:56--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:57--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Aujourd’hui, MAPPING gère quatre types de codes à barre 2D : '''PDF417''', '''DATA MATRIX''', '''QR CODE''' et '''MAXICODE'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:58--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si l'option « '''Adapter à la zone''' » n'est pas cochée, c’est le paramètre « '''Largeur de code barre''' » qui va modifier la taille du code à barre. Dans ce cas il faut savoir que la taille des codes à barre peut varier en hauteur et largeur suivant le contenu à encoder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:59--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’avantage des codes à barre 2D est de pouvoir encoder un nombre important d’informations. Si les données que vous devez encoder se trouvent à différents endroits du spool, reportez-vous au paragraphe [[#cumul-de-données|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8.1.b. Cumul de données&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']] afin de pouvoir les cumuler dans un code à barre unique.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====QR code==== &amp;lt;!--T:60--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:61--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le code à barre '''QR CODE''' a été développé suivant la norme internationale ISO/IEC 18004. Il a la particularité de pouvoir encoder un très grand nombre de caractères (7336 en mode numérique).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:62--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ce type de code barre est très rependu au Japon. Il est utilisé dans l’industrie mais également par le grand public depuis que les téléphones portables sont capables de le décoder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:63--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il existe quatre types d’encodage (alphanumérique, numérique, octets, Kanji) permettant de compresser plus ou moins les données selon leur type. Par défaut, le mode automatique est utilisé afin de choisir l’encodage qui donnera le meilleur taux de compression (basculement de mode en cours de traitement). Par exemple, supposons que le début de la chaine contient des données de type alphanumérique. Dès que le programme détecte une chaine d’au moins 13 caractères numériques, il change de mode d’encodage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:64--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Des codes de détection/correction d’erreur sont ajoutés aux données. Ces codes permettent de résister à des dommages sans perte de donnée. Il existe quatre niveaux de détection/correction d’erreur. Nous utilisons par défaut le niveau trois dont les codes utilisent approximativement 25% du code à barre final.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:65--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image75.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:66--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Options avancées disponibles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:67--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Largeur du code barre : Valeur comprise entre 1 et 15 définissants la taille du code barre.&lt;br /&gt;
*Error Level : (7%, 15%, 25% et 30%).&lt;br /&gt;
*FCN1 :&lt;br /&gt;
**ECI protocol not implemented.&lt;br /&gt;
**ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first position.&lt;br /&gt;
**ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in second position Dans ce dernier cas, un caractère de séparation (application identifier) doit être précisé.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''A'''pplication '''I'''dentifier : Caractère de séparation, utilisé uniquement avec le FCN1 implicite en deuxième position.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Type d’encodage&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
**'''AUTO''' : Encodage automatique des données avec changement de mode en fonction des données.&lt;br /&gt;
**'''ALPHA''' : Encodage Alphanumérique.&lt;br /&gt;
**'''NUMERIC''' : Encodage Numérique.&lt;br /&gt;
**'''BYTE''' : Encodage en octet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====DATAMATRIX==== &amp;lt;!--T:68--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:69--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le code à barres '''Datamatrix''' est défini par la norme internationale ISO/IEC 16022 (ECC200). Ce code permet d’encoder jusqu’à 2335 caractères.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:70--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Divers types d’encodage sont disponibles (ASCII, C40, Text et Base 256) et le mode par défaut est le mode automatique qui permet d’optimiser l’encodage en permutant d’un mode à l’autre suivant les données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:71--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il existe également un système de détection/correction d’erreur pour réparer toute dégradation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:72--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image76.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:73--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Options avancées&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:74--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Largeur du code barre : Valeur comprise entre 1 et 15 définissant la taille du code barre.&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Type d’encodage&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
**'''AUTO''' : Encodage automatique des données avec changement de mode en fonction des données.&lt;br /&gt;
**'''ASCII''' : L’encodage ASCII est un plan tacite pour encoder les données ASCII.&lt;br /&gt;
**'''C40''' : L’encodage C40 transforme 3 caractères alphanumériques en deux codewords.&lt;br /&gt;
**'''TEXT''' : L’encodage Text est utilisé pour encoder les caractères minuscules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====PDF 417==== &amp;lt;!--T:75--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:76--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le PDF 417 est défini par la norme internationale ISO/IEC 15438. Ce type de code à barre permet d’encoder jusqu'à 2700 caractères numériques.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:77--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il existe trois types d’encodage de données (alphanumérique, numérique et octets). Le mode automatique permet de choisir le meilleur taux de compression et de changer de mode en cours d’encodage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:78--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il existe également un mode de détection/correction d’erreur sur huit niveaux. En mode automatique, le niveau sera choisi en fonction du nombre de caractères à encoder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:79--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image77.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:80--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Options avancées&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:81--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Largeur du code barre : Valeur comprise entre 1 et 15, définissant la taille du code barre.&lt;br /&gt;
*Error Level :&lt;br /&gt;
**AUTO : choix automatique.&lt;br /&gt;
**0 - 8&lt;br /&gt;
*Mode compact : Activation du mode compact ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
*Ratio : Permet de déterminer le ratio hauteur/largeur du code barre.&lt;br /&gt;
*Colonnes fixes : permet de définir le nombre de colonnes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Lignes fixes : permet de définir le nombre de lignes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:82--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La sélection d’un ratio empêche de définir le nombre de lignes et de colonnes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====UPS MAXICODE==== &amp;lt;!--T:83--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:84--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ce type de code à barre, développé par UPS – United Parcel Service, est décrit dans la norme ISO 16023-2000. Contrairement aux autres, il a une taille fixe ce qui limite le nombre de caractères à encoder. En effet, le nombre de caractères maximum est de 93 caractères alphanumériques ou de 138 caractères numériques.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:85--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il existe deux types d’encodage :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:86--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Le premier encode uniquement une chaine de caractères contenant des données suivant un encodage classique et une détection / correction d’erreur standard.&lt;br /&gt;
*Le second type encode, en plus de la chaine de données, trois autres champs stockés dans trois espaces mémoire de MapDraw. Ces champs sont : le pays codé sur 3 chiffres suivant la norme ISO 3166 (appelé map_countr), le code postal codé sur 6 caractères (map_zipcod) et enfin un type de service sur 3 chiffres (map_servic). Ces trois champs sont encodés en utilisant un mode de correction d’erreur étendu contrairement à la chaine de données dont le mode de correction est classique.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:87--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image78.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:88--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Options avancées disponibles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:89--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Largeur du code barre : Valeur comprise entre 1 et 15, définissant la taille du code barre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatisation== &amp;lt;!--T:90--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:91--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’automatisation de Designer permet de créer des fichiers images correspondant à la preview d’un projet ainsi que de générer un projet ou une association de projets. Le tout en ligne de commande, en mode caché ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:92--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le principe est de construire la commande grâce à un .BAT ou à une remote commande par exemple.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:93--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-InFile''' : fichier .PAG ou .XML à maquetter.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-OutFile''' : Fichier image de sortie.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-ProjectFile''' : Projet à ouvrir (.MPP).&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-ProjectAsso''' : Association de projet à générer (.MPA).&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-MPIFile''' : Fichier .MPI à ouvrir (onglet MAP).&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-MPWFile''' : Fichier .MPW à ouvrir (onglet DRAW).&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-Hide''' : Pour lancer Designer en mode caché.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-Color''' : Utilisation de couleur ou non pour la création de l’image.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-Rotation''' : angle de rotation de l’image (défaut : 0).&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-Resolution''' : Résolution de l’image (défaut : 300).&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-Specimen''' : Ajout d’un texte au-dessus de l’image (texte à préciser en argument).&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-Mode''' : Choix du mode SPOOL ou XML (défaut SPOOL).&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-Generate''' : Pour lancer la génération du projet indiqué en argument.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-FtpUse''' : 0 = n’utilise pas FTP ; 1 = utilise FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-FtpFolder''' : répertoire FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-FtpLogin''' : Login FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-FtpPassword''' : Mot de passe FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-FtpIPAddress''' : Adresse IP du serveur.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-ShareFolder''' : Répertoire de partage.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-ServerName''' : Nom du serveur (descriptif).&lt;br /&gt;
*'''-Rename''' : change le FORMAT et SEQUENCE du projet en utilisant son nom. Ex : Facture00010.mpp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:94--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Exemple 1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; : Projet généré en PCL, en couleur et 300 dpi&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:95--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;C:\Mapping\M-Designer\M-Designer.exe &amp;amp;quot;-Hide&amp;amp;quot; &amp;amp;quot;-ProjectFile:C:\Mapping\M-Processing_Server \Import\docpc\test.mpp&amp;amp;quot; &amp;amp;quot;-Generate&amp;amp;quot;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:96--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l’utilisation du paramètre « '''-Generate''' » (indiquant une génération de projet), le paramètre « '''-ProjectFile :''' » ou « '''-ProjectAsso :''' » doit être présent pour indiquer le projet à générer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:97--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si les deux paramètres « '''-ProjectFile :''' » et « '''-ProjectAsso :''' » sont présents, le projet sera prioritaire pour la génération et l’association de projets sera ignorée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:98--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Exemple 2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; : création d’une image BMP couleur, avec rotation de 90°, en 203 dpi et avec l’inscription SPECIMEN par-dessus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:99--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;C:\Mapping\M-Designer\M-Designer.exe &amp;amp;quot;-InFile:c:\test.xml&amp;amp;quot; &amp;amp;quot;- OutFile:c:\image.bmp&amp;amp;quot; &amp;amp;quot;-ProjectFile:C:\ Mapping\M-Processing_Server \Import\docpc\test.mpp&amp;amp;quot; &amp;amp;quot;-Hide&amp;amp;quot; &amp;amp;quot;-Rotation:90&amp;amp;quot; &amp;amp;quot;- Resolution:203&amp;amp;quot; “-Color” &amp;amp;quot;-Mode:XML&amp;amp;quot; &amp;amp;quot;-Specimen:SPECIMEN&amp;amp;quot;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:100--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour la création d’une image, les paramètres « '''-InFile''' » et « '''-ProjectFile''' » sont obligatoires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:101--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si « '''-OutFile''' » est absent, le fichier de sortie prend le nom du fichier d’entrée avec l’extension .BMP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:102--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le mode par défaut est SPOOL et si le fichier d’entrée est de type XML, vous devez préciser le mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:103--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Attention''' : Les guillemets autour de chaque paramètre sont '''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;obligatoires&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:104--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;_Remplacement_de_caractère&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;anchor&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Remplacement de caractère== &amp;lt;!--T:105--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:106--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L'objectif est d'expliquer comment remplacer une chaîne de caractères du fichier d'entrée par une autre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:107--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le principe de fonctionnement est l'utilisation d'un fichier texte comme table de correspondance entre la valeur à remplacer et la nouvelle valeur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:108--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser cette table de correspondance, il faut :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:109--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Définir la zone en mode Type = '''Texte''' / Sous-type = '''Substitution'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:110--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image79.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:111--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Terminer et générer la maquette&lt;br /&gt;
*Ouvrir le fichier ''ReplaceValue.txt'' dans un éditeur de texte (type Notepad mais pas Word). La syntaxe du fichier est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:112--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Valeur à remplacer ''Tabulation'' Nouvelle valeur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:113--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image80.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:114--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ici, le caractère &amp;amp;quot;''']'''&amp;amp;quot; sera remplacé par le caractère &amp;amp;quot;'''&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;quot; et le &amp;amp;quot;'''Nom'''&amp;amp;quot; sera remplacé par &amp;amp;quot;'''Name'''&amp;amp;quot; (si la valeur à remplacer se trouve dans une zone de Type Texte \ Substitution).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{warning}} '''Attention:''' il est impératifs que le fichier replacevalue.txt ai le même encodage que le projet Onyx Designer. Par exemple, replaceValue.txt doit être unicode si le projet est unicode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:115--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Sauvegarder le fichier ''ReplaceValue.txt'' dans le sous-répertoire '''lgobitmap''' de Mapping (par défaut /apps/mapping/import/lgobitmap sur Unix)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Dessiner un tableau== &amp;lt;!--T:116--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dessiner un tableau statique=== &amp;lt;!--T:117--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:118--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir un tableau parfaitement dessiné et aligné, sans utiliser l'outil ''Tableau Statique'' de la ''vue Fond de page'', les étapes à suivre sont :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:119--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*tracer d’abord le rectangle du contour du tableau,&lt;br /&gt;
*tracer des lignes verticales pour définir les colonnes,&lt;br /&gt;
*tracer éventuellement des traits horizontaux pour définir les lignes si besoin (entêtes de colonnes par exemple),&lt;br /&gt;
*sélectionner enfin l’ensemble des éléments du tableau puis appuyer sur la touche « '''a''' » minuscule du clavier :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:120--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image83.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:121--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image84.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:122--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remarque :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:123--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cette aide à la conception est opérationnelle en ''vue Fond de page'' et ''vue Dynamique'' du projet. En vue Dynamique, il est possible de tracer un tableau à l'intérieur d'un ''Groupe'' et de placer, par exemple, une condition d'exécution sur une ligne horizontale pour tracer dynamiquement un trait pour chaque nouvelle ligne de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dessiner un tableau dynamique=== &amp;lt;!--T:124--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:125--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Comme annoncé dans les options disponibles pour un groupe (cf. paragraphe [[#créer-un-groupe-fixe|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6.4.b.2. Créer un groupe fixe&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']]), le mode Tableau permet aux zones du groupe de se comporter comme les cellules d’un tableau. Les zones d’une même ligne se retrouvent donc automatiquement collées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:126--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remarque :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:127--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Redimensionner ou déplacer une zone impacte la taille et le positionnement des zones adjacentes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:128--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les lignes du groupe (ou conditions) sont visuellement représentées dans la fenêtre de conception. Les zones sont, quant à elles, réparties verticalement en fonction de leur ligne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:129--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image85.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Construction d’un graphique== &amp;lt;!--T:130--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:131--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Depuis la partie Map :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:132--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Créer un graphique depuis l’onglet Graphique :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:133--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image86.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:134--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Et lui donner un nom (ici « '''''GRAPH1''''' ») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:135--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image87.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:136--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A partir de là, le '''graphique complexe''' peut se construire de deux façons différentes présentées ci-dessous.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Par sélection des zones une à une=== &amp;lt;!--T:137--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:138--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Sélectionner, dans le spool, les zones qui seront utilisées dans le graphique,&lt;br /&gt;
*Dans les '''Propriétés,''' pour chaque zone définie :&lt;br /&gt;
**Les nommer &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;toutes&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; avec le même nom que le graphique (ici ça sera donc « '''''GRAPH1''''' »)&lt;br /&gt;
**Renseigner le '''Type''' = « '''''Graphique'' '''» :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:139--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image88.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:140--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Selon l’utilité de la zone dans le graphique, sélectionner le '''Sous-type''' correspondant dans la liste proposée :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:141--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image89.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:142--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Aller dans les '''Propriétés''' du graphique et cliquer sur '''Edition''' :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:143--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image90.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:144--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Paramétrer votre graphique en choisissant dans les onglets :&lt;br /&gt;
**'''Type''' :&lt;br /&gt;
***'''Nom du Graphique''' : qui sera repris dans le nom des zones,&lt;br /&gt;
***'''Nombre de zones''' qui va composer le graphique,&lt;br /&gt;
***'''Type de graphique''' : ''Camembert'', ''Histogramme'' ou ''Ligne'' :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:145--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image91.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:146--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' : pour le type de graphique = '''''Histogramme''''', il est possible de définir l’espacement entre les barres à droite et à gauche (en %). Cette option peut permettre, par exemple, de superposer deux graphiques en jouant sur l’espacement des barres de chaque graphique.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:147--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image92.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:148--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Attributs''' : permet de choisir le remplissage, le contour, l’épaisseur du contour, le motif, …&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:149--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image93.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:150--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:151--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Positionnement''' : permet de placer les ''titres'' (X, Y, du graphique) et la ''légende'', de redimensionner le graphique selon les préférences de l’utilisateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:152--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' : La zone d’impression du graphique est celle délimitée par le grand rectangle donc tout ce qui ne sera pas dedans ne sera pas visible à l’impression (&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;ex&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; : la zone « '''''Legend''''' » est à l’extérieur du rectangle dans la première image ci-dessous alors qu’elle est dedans dans la deuxième).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:153--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image94.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:154--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image95.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:155--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*La '''Légende''' se construit en sélectionnant les zones dans le spool qui serviront de légende pour les attributs choisis. Comme pour toute autre donnée, il faut nommer la zone comme le nom du graphique et renseigner les propriétés de la zone avec '''Type''' = « '''''Graphique''''' » et '''Sous-type''' = « '''''Données de la légende''''' ».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:156--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NB&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' : Attention à respecter l’ordre des attributs en sélectionnant les zones qui serviront à la légende car elles suivront le même ordre que celui des attributs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===En créant un groupe=== &amp;lt;!--T:157--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:158--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le principe est le même que celui décrit ci-avant sauf que les données sont regroupées dans un groupe. Cette option est possible si les données du graphique se suivent dans le spool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:159--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Créer un groupe qui définira les données à prendre en compte pour la construction du graphique et y déposer les zones sélectionnées qui contiennent les données, les titres, légende, ...&lt;br /&gt;
*Nommer la/les zone(s) du même nom que le graphique et renseigner ses propriétés avec '''Type''' = « '''''Graphique''''' » et le '''Sous-type''' selon le rôle de la zone (titre, données, légende…).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:160--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La suite de la construction du graphique est la même que celle décrite précédemment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Opérations arithmétiques dans un groupe== &amp;lt;!--T:161--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:162--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour simplifier la gestion de calcul dans un groupe et notamment la gestion de « '''total''' » et « '''sous-total''' », un outil a été intégré à Designer. Il permet d’effectuer des traitements sur un fichier XML d’entrée à l’aide de scripts. Ces scripts sont exécutés avant l’application de la maquette.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:163--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image96.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:164--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image97.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:165--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’ajout de calcul dans un groupe, par l’intermédiaire de cet outil, se fait par la fonction de script « '''addline''' ». La fonction '''addline''' permet d’ajouter une ligne à un groupe, en lui précisant une séquence de couples « '''nom du champ'''/'''valeur''' » à ajouter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:166--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
De plus, les paramètres de type « '''chaine de caractère''' » devront être entourés de '''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;doubles guillemets&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' et les noms de champ dans les formules par des '''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;simples guillemets&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:167--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Syntaxe&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:168--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
addline(nom du groupe, nom de la ligne, ligne de type saut de page, nom du 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;er&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; champ, valeur du 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;er&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; champ, pré-calcul du 1er champ, nom du 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;ème&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; champ, valeur du 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;ème&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; champ, pré-calcul du 2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;ème&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; champ, etc…) ;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:169--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La fonction '''addline''' commence par les arguments suivants :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:170--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Nom du groupe''' : Contient le nom du groupe sur lequel la ligne doit s’ajouter.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Nom de la ligne''' : Nom de la ligne à ajouter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:171--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Puis, elle se compose d’une séquence illimitée de couples '''champ''' / valeur :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:172--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Nom du champ''' : Nom du champ que possèdera la ligne.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Valeur du champ''' : La valeur du champ possédé par la ligne.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Pré-calcul''': Valeur booléenne. (0 ou 1, yes ou no). Si le champ possède un calcul alors cela permet de définir quand le calcul doit s’effectuer :&lt;br /&gt;
**'''Yes''' : Le calcul est résolu lors de l’exécution du script, prenant en compte toutes les valeurs du xml.&lt;br /&gt;
**'''No''' : Le calcul est résolu lors de l’utilisation de la valeur dans une maquette et ne prend donc en compte que les valeurs présentes dans la page en cours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:173--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, le script suivant ajoute cette ligne au groupe nommé &amp;amp;quot;groupe&amp;amp;quot; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:174--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;addline(&amp;amp;quot;groupe&amp;amp;quot;,&amp;amp;quot;ligne&amp;amp;quot;,yes,&amp;amp;quot;champ1&amp;amp;quot;,&amp;amp;quot;valeur1&amp;amp;quot;,no,&amp;amp;quot;champ2&amp;amp;quot;,&amp;amp;quot;valeur2&amp;amp;quot;,no);&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:175--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;groupe&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;…&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;ligne&amp;amp;quot; pagebreak=”1”&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;champ1&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;valeur1&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;champ2&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;valeur2&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:176--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La '''valeur du champ''' peut contenir un calcul dont la syntaxe est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:177--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[SUM('''''opération''''')]]''' pour calculer une somme sur l’ensemble des lignes du groupes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:178--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[AVG('''''opération''''')]]''' pour calculer une moyenne sur l’ensemble des lignes du groupes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:179--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Ici, « opération »'' est un calcul mathématique utilisant les noms des champs présents dans les lignes du groupe. Les noms de champs doivent être entourés par des '''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;simples guillemets&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:180--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Prenons l’exemple de ce groupe :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:181--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;invoice&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 1&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;price&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;10&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;quantity&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;2&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 2&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;price&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;5&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;quantity&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;3&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 3&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;price&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;12&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;quantity&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;4&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 4&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;price&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;5.5&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;quantity&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;3&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:182--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour ajouter une ligne de total à ce groupe, il faudra utiliser ce script :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:183--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;addline(&amp;amp;quot;invoice&amp;amp;quot;, &amp;amp;quot;LigneTotal&amp;amp;quot;,no&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:184--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;quot;total&amp;amp;quot;, &amp;amp;quot;total = [[SUM('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;amp;quot;, yes&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:185--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;quot;moyenne&amp;amp;quot;, &amp;amp;quot;moyenne = [[AVG('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;amp;quot;, yes&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:186--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;);&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:187--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ce script aura pour effet d’ajouter une ligne de '''total''' à la fin du groupe :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:188--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;invoice&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;…&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 4&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;price&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;5.5&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;quantity&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;3&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;LigneTotal&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;total&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;total = 99.5&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;moyenne&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;moyenne = 24.875&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:189--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’utilisation de '''l’option Pré-calcul''' à '''« no »''' permet de ne pas exécuter les calculs lors de l’ajout de la ligne au groupe mais lors de son exécution par la maquette. L’intérêt de cette option est de pouvoir effectuer des calculs uniquement avec les données écrites sur la page en cours, permettant donc l’écriture de sous-totaux.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:190--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour ajouter une ligne de '''sous-total''' au groupe précédant, il faudra utiliser ce script :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:191--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;addline(&amp;amp;quot;invoice&amp;amp;quot;,&amp;amp;quot;LineSubtotal&amp;amp;quot;,yes, &amp;amp;quot;subtotal&amp;amp;quot;,&amp;amp;quot;sous-total = [[SUM('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;amp;quot;,no);&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:192--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ce script aura pour effet d’ajouter une ligne de total à la fin du groupe :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:193--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;invoice&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;…&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 4&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;price&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;5.5&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;quantity&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;3&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;LineSubtotal&amp;amp;quot; pagebreak=”1”&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;subtotal&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;sous-total = [[SUM('price'*'quantity')]]&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Gestion de la pagination== &amp;lt;!--T:194--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:195--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La gestion de l’écriture d’information de pagination tels que le nombre de page total, le nombre de lot et le nombre de page dans le lot est possible dans Designer grâce aux deux options suivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rupture de lot=== &amp;lt;!--T:196--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:197--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’option '''Rupture de lot''' se trouve dans les '''Propriétés''' de la maquette (présentée dans le paragraphe [[#création-dun-projet-1|''&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4.2. Création d’un projet&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'']]). Elle permet de définir une zone de type '''Metadata''' qui sera utilisée pour regrouper les pages du document final en lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:198--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image98.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:199--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors du traitement de la page :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:200--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Si la zone '''Metadata''' récupère une nouvelle valeur alors un nouveau lot sera créé. La page en cours appartiendra à ce nouveau lot.&lt;br /&gt;
*Si la zone '''Metadata''' récupère une valeur déjà récupérée précédemment, la page en cours sera déplacée vers le lot correspondant à cette valeur.&lt;br /&gt;
*Si aucune valeur n’est récupérée par la zone '''Metadata''', la page reste dans le même lot que la page précédente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:201--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
C’est le système de multi-document du XPS qui est utilisé pour représenter les lots, le fichier de sortie est donc trié par lot (d’abord les pages du premier lot puis les pages du second, etc…).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Variables de remplacement=== &amp;lt;!--T:202--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:203--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour permettre l’écriture des informations de pagination, il existe des variables de type « ''post-traitement'' », c’est-à-dire qu’elles ne seront remplacées par leur véritable valeur qu’au moment de l’impression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:204--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ces variables, qui peuvent être utilisées dans des zones ou dans des blocs de texte, sont les suivantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:205--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MAP_TOTAL_PAGE''' = nombre total de page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:206--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MAP_TOTAL_DOC''' = nombre total de lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:207--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''MAP_TOTAL_PAGE_IN_DOC''' = nombre de page dans le lot en cours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:208--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La syntaxe d’utilisation est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:209--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[PST:'''''nom de la variable''''';'''''valeur par défaut''''']]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:210--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La « '''''valeur par défaut''''' » est obligatoire et permet d’avoir un texte présent dans la page. Ce texte temporaire sera, par la suite, remplacé par sa vraie valeur. Il est important car c’est grâce à ce texte que les calculs de positionnement se feront. Ce texte doit donc posséder un nombre de caractère au moins égal à la valeur maximale attendue par la variable utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:211--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:212--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[PST:MAP_TOTAL_PAGE;000]]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:213--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Affichera '''&amp;amp;quot;000&amp;amp;quot;''' dans la page, mais au moment de l’impression cette valeur sera remplacée par :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:214--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''&amp;amp;quot; 5&amp;amp;quot;''' s’il y 5 pages au total.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''&amp;amp;quot; 10&amp;amp;quot;''' s’il y 10 pages au total.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''&amp;amp;quot;150&amp;amp;quot;''' s’il y 150 pages au total.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:215--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
D’autre syntaxes existent aussi, accessibles quant à elles pendant le traitement de la page :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:216--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[VAR:MAP_CURRENT_PAGE]]''' = numéro de la page en cours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:217--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[VAR:MAP_CURRENT_DOC]]''' = numéro du lot en cours (la zone '''Metadata''' gérant la rupture de lot doit être définie avant l’utilisation de cette variable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:218--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[VAR:MAP_CURRENT_PAGE_IN_DOC]]''' = numéro de la page en cours dans le lot en cours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:219--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Et de manière générale :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:220--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[VAR:variable d’env]]''' = récupère le contenu de la variable d’environnement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Gestion des veuves et orphelines== &amp;lt;!--T:221--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:222--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Une gestion complexe des veuves et orphelines est possible grâce à deux fonctionnalités : '''Groupe entier''' et '''Répéter''' un groupe XML.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Groupe entier=== &amp;lt;!--T:223--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:224--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu’on utilise une génération de saut de page de type '''Limite''', une nouvelle option apparait dans les '''Propriétés''' du groupe : '''Groupe entier'''. Cette option permet d’indiquer que le groupe ne peut pas être coupé et qu’il doit donc s’imprimer intégralement sur une seule page. Si la limite déclenche un saut de page, aucune ligne du groupe ne sera imprimée, le groupe sera entièrement traité sur la page suivante.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:225--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image99.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Répétition de groupe XML=== &amp;lt;!--T:226--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:227--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La répétition de groupe XML part du principe que le groupe apparait plusieurs fois dans le fichier XML d’entrée. Cette fonctionnalité s’active avec le paramètre « R'''épéter''' » dans les propriétés du groupe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:228--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:onyxdesigner-image100.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:229--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;underline&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Exemple&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:230--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans l’exemple ci-dessous, le groupe “'''''invoice'''''” apparait trois fois dans le XML. Par défaut, le groupe de la maquette ne pourra récupérer que les informations de la première apparition du groupe dans le XML. Mais si l’option « '''Répéter''' » est cochée, l’exécution du groupe se poursuivra sur toutes les apparitions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:231--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;'''invoice'''&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 1&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;price&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;10&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;quantity&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;2&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;description&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;description&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;Description item 1&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;'''invoice'''&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 2&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;price&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;5&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;quantity&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;3&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;description&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;description&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;Description item 2&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;group name=&amp;amp;quot;'''invoice'''&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;item&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;name&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;item 3&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;price&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;12&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;quantity&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;4&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;line name=&amp;amp;quot;description&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;field name=&amp;amp;quot;description&amp;amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;Description item 3&amp;amp;lt;/field&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/line&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/group&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:232--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L’utilisation conjointe d’une limite générant des sauts de page avec l’option “'''Groupe entier'''” et la répétition active permet de gérer un système complexe de veuves et orphelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:233--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans notre exemple, les lignes « '''''item''''' » et les lignes « '''''description''''' » ne pourront pas être séparées par un saut de page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Mapmail&amp;diff=30767</id>
		<title>Mapmail</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Mapmail&amp;diff=30767"/>
		<updated>2020-03-11T15:33:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;C'est le nouveau binaire d'envoi de mail de mapping apparus dans la version 10.0 de ONYX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Liste des paramètres==&lt;br /&gt;
  -server:XXXXX            Serveur SMTP(192.168.1.1, seversmtp.mydomain.local)&lt;br /&gt;
  -from:XXXXX              Expediteur(user@mydomain.local)&lt;br /&gt;
  -to:XXXXX                Destinataire(user@otherdomain.com)&lt;br /&gt;
  -subject:XXXXX           Sujet (No Subject si vide)&lt;br /&gt;
  -message:XXXXX           Message(message)&lt;br /&gt;
 [-file_name:XXXXX       ] Chemin + nom du fichier joint&lt;br /&gt;
 [-attachment_name:XXXXX ] Nom du fichier joint inséré dans l'email&lt;br /&gt;
 [-cc:XXXXX              ] Copie&lt;br /&gt;
 [-bcc:XXXXX             ] Copie cachée&lt;br /&gt;
 [-port:XXXXX            ] Port SMTP(defaut : 25)&lt;br /&gt;
 [-verbose               ] Mode verbeux&lt;br /&gt;
 [-login:XXXXX           ] login pour l'authentification au serveur SMTP&lt;br /&gt;
 [-passwd:XXXXX          ] mot de passe pour l'authentification au serveur SMTP&lt;br /&gt;
 [-use_html              ] envoi en text/html (si utilisé alors le -message doit être en html)&lt;br /&gt;
 [-acknowledgment        ] accuse de reception&lt;br /&gt;
 [-read_receipt          ] accuse de lecture&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Règles d'utilisations [10.0]==&lt;br /&gt;
===Sujet du mail===&lt;br /&gt;
Ce paramètre est considéré comme obligatoire. Mais, si il n'est pas renseigné, mapmail enverra un mail avec le sujet &amp;quot;No subject&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
===Les Pièces jointes===&lt;br /&gt;
Pour chaques pièces jointes ajoutées à mapmail avec &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-file_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, il faut obligatoirement renseigner un nom avec &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-attachment_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
Si mapmail constate qu'il n'y a pas autant de chemin de pièces-jointes que de noms, il s'arrêtera en indiquant qu'un ou plusieurs paramètres sont manquants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms sont associés aux fichiers par ordre d'arrivée. Le premier &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-file_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; renomme le premier &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-attachment_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exemples==&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec un serveur SMTP local===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:192.168.1.5 -port:2525 -from:jim.barnett@server.local -to:paul.sernine@server.local &lt;br /&gt;
 -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec identifiants===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:smtp.office365.com -port:587 -from:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -to:paul.sernine@mappingsuite.com&lt;br /&gt;
 -login:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -passwd:&amp;quot;your passwd&amp;quot; -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec pièces jointes===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:192.168.1.5 -port:2525  -from:jim.barnett@server.local -to:paul.sernine@server.local &lt;br /&gt;
 -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot; -file_name:&amp;quot;C:\path\to\file1.xps&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
 -file_name:&amp;quot;C:\path\to\file2.pdf&amp;quot; -attachment_name:nameForFile1.xps -attachment_name:nameForFile2.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types d'erreurs===&lt;br /&gt;
Le programme peut retourner 3 status d'erreurs différents:&lt;br /&gt;
* retour 1: Il manque un ou plusieurs paramètres.&lt;br /&gt;
* retour 2: Ce message n'est normalement pas visible par l'utilisateur, il indique au programme qu'il doit tenter une connexion TLS.&lt;br /&gt;
* retour 3: Une erreur est survenue pendant la connexion au serveur SMTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* retour 4: Une erreur est survenue pendant l'envoi du mail.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Mapmail&amp;diff=30757</id>
		<title>Mapmail</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Mapmail&amp;diff=30757"/>
		<updated>2020-03-11T09:57:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : /* Mail avec pièces jointes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;C'est le nouveau binaire d'envoi de mail de mapping apparus dans la version 10.0 de ONYX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Liste des paramètres==&lt;br /&gt;
  -server:XXXXX            Serveur SMTP(192.168.1.1, seversmtp.mydomain.local)&lt;br /&gt;
  -from:XXXXX              Expediteur(user@mydomain.local)&lt;br /&gt;
  -to:XXXXX                Destinataire(user@otherdomain.com)&lt;br /&gt;
  -subject:XXXXX           Sujet&lt;br /&gt;
  -message:XXXXX           Message(message ou stdin)&lt;br /&gt;
 [-file_name:XXXXX       ] Chemin du fichier joint&lt;br /&gt;
 [-attachment_name:XXXXX ] Nom du fichier joint&lt;br /&gt;
 [-cc:XXXXX              ] Copie&lt;br /&gt;
 [-bcc:XXXXX             ] Copie cachee&lt;br /&gt;
 [-port:XXXXX            ] Port SMTP(defaut : 25)&lt;br /&gt;
 [-verbose               ] Mode verbeux&lt;br /&gt;
 [-login:XXXXX           ] login pour l'authentification au serveur SMTP&lt;br /&gt;
 [-passwd:XXXXX          ] mot de passe pour l'authentification au serveur SMTP&lt;br /&gt;
 [-use_html              ] envoi en text/html&lt;br /&gt;
 [-acknowledgment        ] accuse de reception&lt;br /&gt;
 [-read_receipt          ] accuse de lecture&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Règles d'utilisations [10.0]==&lt;br /&gt;
===Sujet du mail===&lt;br /&gt;
Ce paramètre est considéré comme obligatoire. Mais, si il n'est pas renseigné, mapmail enverra un mail avec le sujet &amp;quot;No subject&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
===Les Pièces jointes===&lt;br /&gt;
Pour caques pièces jointes ajoutées à mapmail avec &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-file_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, il faut obligatoirement renseigner un nom avec &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-attachment_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
Si mapmail constate qu'il n'y a pas autant de chemin de pièces-jointes que de noms, il s'arrêtera en indiquant qu'un ou plusieurs paramètres sont manquants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms sont associés aux fichiers par ordre d'arrivée. Le premier &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-file_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; renomme le premier &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-attachment_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exemples==&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec un serveur SMTP local===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:192.168.1.5 -port:2525 -from:jim.barnett@server.local -to:paul.sernine@server.local &lt;br /&gt;
 -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec identifiants===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:smtp.office365.com -port:587 -from:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -to:paul.sernine@mappingsuite.com&lt;br /&gt;
 -login:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -passwd:&amp;quot;your passwd&amp;quot; -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec pièces jointes===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:192.168.1.5 -port:2525  -from:jim.barnett@server.local -to:paul.sernine@server.local &lt;br /&gt;
 -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot; -attachment_name:&amp;quot;C:\path\to\file1.xps&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
 -attachment_name:&amp;quot;C:\path\to\file2.pdf&amp;quot; -file_name:nameForFile1.xps -file_name:nameForFile2.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Mapmail&amp;diff=30756</id>
		<title>Mapmail</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Mapmail&amp;diff=30756"/>
		<updated>2020-03-11T09:57:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : /* Mail avec un serveur SMTP local */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;C'est le nouveau binaire d'envoi de mail de mapping apparus dans la version 10.0 de ONYX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Liste des paramètres==&lt;br /&gt;
  -server:XXXXX            Serveur SMTP(192.168.1.1, seversmtp.mydomain.local)&lt;br /&gt;
  -from:XXXXX              Expediteur(user@mydomain.local)&lt;br /&gt;
  -to:XXXXX                Destinataire(user@otherdomain.com)&lt;br /&gt;
  -subject:XXXXX           Sujet&lt;br /&gt;
  -message:XXXXX           Message(message ou stdin)&lt;br /&gt;
 [-file_name:XXXXX       ] Chemin du fichier joint&lt;br /&gt;
 [-attachment_name:XXXXX ] Nom du fichier joint&lt;br /&gt;
 [-cc:XXXXX              ] Copie&lt;br /&gt;
 [-bcc:XXXXX             ] Copie cachee&lt;br /&gt;
 [-port:XXXXX            ] Port SMTP(defaut : 25)&lt;br /&gt;
 [-verbose               ] Mode verbeux&lt;br /&gt;
 [-login:XXXXX           ] login pour l'authentification au serveur SMTP&lt;br /&gt;
 [-passwd:XXXXX          ] mot de passe pour l'authentification au serveur SMTP&lt;br /&gt;
 [-use_html              ] envoi en text/html&lt;br /&gt;
 [-acknowledgment        ] accuse de reception&lt;br /&gt;
 [-read_receipt          ] accuse de lecture&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Règles d'utilisations [10.0]==&lt;br /&gt;
===Sujet du mail===&lt;br /&gt;
Ce paramètre est considéré comme obligatoire. Mais, si il n'est pas renseigné, mapmail enverra un mail avec le sujet &amp;quot;No subject&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
===Les Pièces jointes===&lt;br /&gt;
Pour caques pièces jointes ajoutées à mapmail avec &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-file_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, il faut obligatoirement renseigner un nom avec &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-attachment_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
Si mapmail constate qu'il n'y a pas autant de chemin de pièces-jointes que de noms, il s'arrêtera en indiquant qu'un ou plusieurs paramètres sont manquants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms sont associés aux fichiers par ordre d'arrivée. Le premier &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-file_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; renomme le premier &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-attachment_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exemples==&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec un serveur SMTP local===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:192.168.1.5 -port:2525 -from:jim.barnett@server.local -to:paul.sernine@server.local &lt;br /&gt;
 -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec identifiants===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:smtp.office365.com -port:587 -from:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -to:paul.sernine@mappingsuite.com&lt;br /&gt;
 -login:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -passwd:&amp;quot;your passwd&amp;quot; -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec pièces jointes===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:192.168.1.5 -port:2525 -from:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -to:paul.sernine@mappingsuite.com &lt;br /&gt;
 -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot; -attachment_name:&amp;quot;C:\path\to\file1.xps&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
 -attachment_name:&amp;quot;C:\path\to\file2.pdf&amp;quot; -file_name:nameForFile1.xps -file_name:nameForFile2.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Mapmail&amp;diff=30755</id>
		<title>Mapmail</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Mapmail&amp;diff=30755"/>
		<updated>2020-03-11T09:49:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : /* Mail avec pièces jointes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;C'est le nouveau binaire d'envoi de mail de mapping apparus dans la version 10.0 de ONYX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Liste des paramètres==&lt;br /&gt;
  -server:XXXXX            Serveur SMTP(192.168.1.1, seversmtp.mydomain.local)&lt;br /&gt;
  -from:XXXXX              Expediteur(user@mydomain.local)&lt;br /&gt;
  -to:XXXXX                Destinataire(user@otherdomain.com)&lt;br /&gt;
  -subject:XXXXX           Sujet&lt;br /&gt;
  -message:XXXXX           Message(message ou stdin)&lt;br /&gt;
 [-file_name:XXXXX       ] Chemin du fichier joint&lt;br /&gt;
 [-attachment_name:XXXXX ] Nom du fichier joint&lt;br /&gt;
 [-cc:XXXXX              ] Copie&lt;br /&gt;
 [-bcc:XXXXX             ] Copie cachee&lt;br /&gt;
 [-port:XXXXX            ] Port SMTP(defaut : 25)&lt;br /&gt;
 [-verbose               ] Mode verbeux&lt;br /&gt;
 [-login:XXXXX           ] login pour l'authentification au serveur SMTP&lt;br /&gt;
 [-passwd:XXXXX          ] mot de passe pour l'authentification au serveur SMTP&lt;br /&gt;
 [-use_html              ] envoi en text/html&lt;br /&gt;
 [-acknowledgment        ] accuse de reception&lt;br /&gt;
 [-read_receipt          ] accuse de lecture&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Règles d'utilisations [10.0]==&lt;br /&gt;
===Sujet du mail===&lt;br /&gt;
Ce paramètre est considéré comme obligatoire. Mais, si il n'est pas renseigné, mapmail enverra un mail avec le sujet &amp;quot;No subject&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
===Les Pièces jointes===&lt;br /&gt;
Pour caques pièces jointes ajoutées à mapmail avec &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-file_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, il faut obligatoirement renseigner un nom avec &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-attachment_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
Si mapmail constate qu'il n'y a pas autant de chemin de pièces-jointes que de noms, il s'arrêtera en indiquant qu'un ou plusieurs paramètres sont manquants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms sont associés aux fichiers par ordre d'arrivée. Le premier &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-file_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; renomme le premier &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-attachment_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exemples==&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec un serveur SMTP local===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:192.168.1.5 -port:2525 -from:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -to:paul.sernine@mappingsuite.com &lt;br /&gt;
 -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec identifiants===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:smtp.office365.com -port:587 -from:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -to:paul.sernine@mappingsuite.com&lt;br /&gt;
 -login:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -passwd:&amp;quot;your passwd&amp;quot; -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec pièces jointes===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:192.168.1.5 -port:2525 -from:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -to:paul.sernine@mappingsuite.com &lt;br /&gt;
 -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot; -attachment_name:&amp;quot;C:\path\to\file1.xps&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
 -attachment_name:&amp;quot;C:\path\to\file2.pdf&amp;quot; -file_name:nameForFile1.xps -file_name:nameForFile2.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Mapmail&amp;diff=30754</id>
		<title>Mapmail</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Mapmail&amp;diff=30754"/>
		<updated>2020-03-11T09:49:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : Page créée avec « C'est le nouveau binaire d'envoi de mail de mapping apparus dans la version 10.0 de ONYX.  ==Liste des paramètres==   -server:XXXXX            Serveur SMTP(192.168.1.1, s... »&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;C'est le nouveau binaire d'envoi de mail de mapping apparus dans la version 10.0 de ONYX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Liste des paramètres==&lt;br /&gt;
  -server:XXXXX            Serveur SMTP(192.168.1.1, seversmtp.mydomain.local)&lt;br /&gt;
  -from:XXXXX              Expediteur(user@mydomain.local)&lt;br /&gt;
  -to:XXXXX                Destinataire(user@otherdomain.com)&lt;br /&gt;
  -subject:XXXXX           Sujet&lt;br /&gt;
  -message:XXXXX           Message(message ou stdin)&lt;br /&gt;
 [-file_name:XXXXX       ] Chemin du fichier joint&lt;br /&gt;
 [-attachment_name:XXXXX ] Nom du fichier joint&lt;br /&gt;
 [-cc:XXXXX              ] Copie&lt;br /&gt;
 [-bcc:XXXXX             ] Copie cachee&lt;br /&gt;
 [-port:XXXXX            ] Port SMTP(defaut : 25)&lt;br /&gt;
 [-verbose               ] Mode verbeux&lt;br /&gt;
 [-login:XXXXX           ] login pour l'authentification au serveur SMTP&lt;br /&gt;
 [-passwd:XXXXX          ] mot de passe pour l'authentification au serveur SMTP&lt;br /&gt;
 [-use_html              ] envoi en text/html&lt;br /&gt;
 [-acknowledgment        ] accuse de reception&lt;br /&gt;
 [-read_receipt          ] accuse de lecture&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Règles d'utilisations [10.0]==&lt;br /&gt;
===Sujet du mail===&lt;br /&gt;
Ce paramètre est considéré comme obligatoire. Mais, si il n'est pas renseigné, mapmail enverra un mail avec le sujet &amp;quot;No subject&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
===Les Pièces jointes===&lt;br /&gt;
Pour caques pièces jointes ajoutées à mapmail avec &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-file_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, il faut obligatoirement renseigner un nom avec &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-attachment_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
Si mapmail constate qu'il n'y a pas autant de chemin de pièces-jointes que de noms, il s'arrêtera en indiquant qu'un ou plusieurs paramètres sont manquants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms sont associés aux fichiers par ordre d'arrivée. Le premier &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-file_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; renomme le premier &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-attachment_name:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
==Exemples==&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec un serveur SMTP local===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:192.168.1.5 -port:2525 -from:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -to:paul.sernine@mappingsuite.com &lt;br /&gt;
 -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec identifiants===&lt;br /&gt;
 mapmail -server:smtp.office365.com -port:587 -from:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -to:paul.sernine@mappingsuite.com&lt;br /&gt;
 -login:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -passwd:&amp;quot;your passwd&amp;quot; -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
===Mail avec pièces jointes===&lt;br /&gt;
mapmail -server:192.168.1.5 -port:2525 -from:jim.barnett@mappingsuite.com -to:paul.sernine@mappingsuite.com &lt;br /&gt;
 -subject:&amp;quot;Exemple de mail&amp;quot; -message:&amp;quot;Bonjour, ceci est un test.&amp;quot; -attachment_name:&amp;quot;C:\path\to\file1.xps&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
 -attachment_name:&amp;quot;C:\path\to\file2.pdf&amp;quot; -file_name:nameForFile1.xps -file_name:nameForFile2.pdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=ONYX:9.1:Utilisation:Rollback_des_formats_Designer_et_Connect&amp;diff=30264</id>
		<title>ONYX:9.1:Utilisation:Rollback des formats Designer et Connect</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=ONYX:9.1:Utilisation:Rollback_des_formats_Designer_et_Connect&amp;diff=30264"/>
		<updated>2019-12-18T14:20:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Mapping 9.1 et au-delà intègre dans les écrans des formats Designer et Connect un module permettant la gestion de leurs différentes versions. Cette fonctionnalité donne la possibilité à l'utilisateur de remettre en action des versions précédentes de templates Designer et Connect.&lt;br /&gt;
Cela peut être très utile, par exemple, en cas de necessité de faire un rollback vers une version précédente d'un template Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prérequis== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Mapping Onyx 9.1 ou supérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Limites== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cette fonctionnalité est disponible uniquement pour les actions de rollbacks effectuées via l'interface (non disponible lors d'utilisation des commandes map_import et map_export).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fonctionnement== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Paramétrage===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Deux nouveaux paramètres sont apparus dans le mapping.conf: &lt;br /&gt;
# '''[VERSIONING_TOGGLE]: ''' Permet d'activer le système de rollback. &lt;br /&gt;
# '''[FORMAT_REPOSITORY_DIR_FULLPATH]: ''' Indique le chemin et le nom du répertoire contenant les différentes versions des formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;block name=&amp;quot;EXPERT PATH&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
           ...&lt;br /&gt;
           '''&amp;lt;info name=&amp;quot;[FORMAT_REPOSITORY_DIR_FULLPATH]&amp;quot;&amp;gt;/apps/mapping/map400/repository&amp;lt;/info&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
           ...		&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/block&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 ...&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;block name=&amp;quot;OTHERS&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
             ...&lt;br /&gt;
             '''&amp;lt;info name=&amp;quot;[VERSIONING_TOGGLE]&amp;quot;&amp;gt;YES&amp;lt;/info&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
             ...&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;/element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/block&amp;gt;		&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces entrées sont créées automatiquement à l'installation de Mapping 9.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les valeurs par défaut à l'installation sont ''NO'' pour '''VERSIONING_TOGGLE''' et ''/apps/mapping/map400/repository'' pour '''FORMAT_REPOSITORY_DIR_FULLPATH'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le répertoire repository est également créé automatiquement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interface=== &amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le versioning est disponible pour les formats importés de Designer et de Connect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formats Designer==== &amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sur le serveur Mapping 9.1 et au-delà, aller dans la '''Gestion des formats Designer''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sur le menu Mapping, cliquer sur :&lt;br /&gt;
::#Gestion de formats Designer&lt;br /&gt;
::#Gestion des formats&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La liste de formats Designer opérationnels s'affiche alors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING1.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est alors possible de rentrer dans la gestion des différentes versions d'un format donné en cliquant sur le '''i''' correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La fenêtre suivante listant toutes les versions et l'historique de toutes les activations du format s'ouvre alors :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING2.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1 : Format concerné&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2 : Numéro de version du format concerné&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 : Utilisateur ayant procédé à l'importation ou au dernier rollback&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4 : Commentaire saisi lors d'un rollback&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5 : Date et heure de l'activation de la version&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6 : Date et heure de jusqu'à quand la version était active&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7 : Bouton de rollback&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Rollback de la version V4&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans cet exemple, nous allons réactiver la version V4 en cliquant sur son bouton '''Rollback''' :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING3.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Voici le résultat alors obtenu :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING4.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La version 4 du format est alors activée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Remarque&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Il est également possible d'avoir une vue d'ensemble sur tous les formats et de toutes leurs versions. Pour cela, il faut aller sur le sous-menu '''Historique des formats''' du menu '''Gestion des formats Designer'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING5.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format Connect=== &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le fonctionnement avec les formats Connect est le même qu'avec les formats Designer. Nous vous invitons à vous référer à la partie des formats Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ligne de commandes== &amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est également possible de faire du versioning en ligne de commande en utilisant le binaire '''mapobjectversioncontrol'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Exemple d'utilisation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : &lt;br /&gt;
 // Sauvegarde le projet KUHN en séquence 20 actuellement en production&lt;br /&gt;
 mapobjectversioncontrol backup &amp;quot;KUHN&amp;quot; &amp;quot;00020&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
// Restaure le projet KUHN en séquence 10 comme il était en production le 27 avril&lt;br /&gt;
 mapobjectversioncontrol restore &amp;quot;2019-04-27T23:59:59.000Z&amp;quot; &amp;quot;KUHN&amp;quot; &amp;quot;00010&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
// Liste les projets déjà versionnés&lt;br /&gt;
 mapobjectversioncontrol list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les actions ayant un impact sur le repository sont versionnées automatiquement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il sera bientôt possible de restaurer grâce au numéro de version :&lt;br /&gt;
  mapobjectversioncontrol restore &amp;quot;KUHN&amp;quot; &amp;quot;00010&amp;quot; v3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cas particulier== &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Cas des formats déjà présents===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le cas où des formats sont déjà présents dans l'environnement (créés grâce à la copie du contenu du répertoire MAP400 à partir d'un environnement sans mécanisme de versioning ou lors de l'upgrade d'une version antérieure à la V9.1), la version V0 de ce format ne sera pas sauvegardée dans le mécanisme de versioning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par conséquent, lors de l'import de la prochaine version V1 de ce format, la version V1 sera bien sauvegardée mais la V0 sera perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Afin d'éviter cela, avant d'importer la V1 du format, il faut exécuter la commande suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
 /apps/mapping/bin/mapobjectversioncontrol backup &amp;quot;format&amp;quot; &amp;quot;sequence&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cela aura pour effet de créer une entrée de la version V0 dans le mécanisme de versioning.&lt;br /&gt;
Cette version sera alors disponible dans l'interface de rollback des formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=ONYX:9.1:Utilisation:Rollback_des_formats_Designer_et_Connect&amp;diff=29799</id>
		<title>ONYX:9.1:Utilisation:Rollback des formats Designer et Connect</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=ONYX:9.1:Utilisation:Rollback_des_formats_Designer_et_Connect&amp;diff=29799"/>
		<updated>2019-12-06T17:17:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : /* Paramétrage */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Mapping 9.1 et au-delà intègre dans les écrans des formats Designer et Connect un module permettant la gestion de leurs différentes versions. Cette fonctionnalité donne la possibilité à l'utilisateur de remettre en action des versions précédentes de templates Designer et Connect.&lt;br /&gt;
Cela peut être très utile, par exemple, en cas de necessité de faire un rollback vers une version précédente d'un template Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prérequis== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Mapping Onyx 9.1 ou supérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Limites== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cette fonctionnalité est disponible uniquement pour les actions de rollbacks effectuées via l'interface (non disponible lors d'utilisation des commandes map_import et map_export).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fonctionnement== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Paramétrage===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Deux nouveaux paramètres sont apparus dans le mapping.conf: &lt;br /&gt;
# '''[VERSIONING_TOGGLE]: ''' Permet d'activer le système de rollback. &lt;br /&gt;
# '''[FORMAT_REPOSITORY_DIR_FULLPATH]: ''' Indique le chemin et le nom du répertoire contenant les différentes versions des formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;block name=&amp;quot;EXPERT PATH&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
           ...&lt;br /&gt;
           '''&amp;lt;info name=&amp;quot;[FORMAT_REPOSITORY_DIR_FULLPATH]&amp;quot;&amp;gt;/apps/mapping/map400/repository&amp;lt;/info&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
           ...		&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/block&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 ...&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;block name=&amp;quot;OTHERS&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
             ...&lt;br /&gt;
             '''&amp;lt;info name=&amp;quot;[VERSIONING_TOGGLE]&amp;quot;&amp;gt;YES&amp;lt;/info&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
             ...&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;/element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/block&amp;gt;		&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces entrées sont créées automatiquement à l'installation de Mapping 9.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les valeurs par défaut à l'installation sont ''NO'' pour '''VERSIONING_TOGGLE''' et ''/home/mapping/map400/repository'' pour '''FORMAT_REPOSITORY_DIR_FULLPATH'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le répertoire repository est également créé automatiquement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interface=== &amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le versioning est disponible pour les formats importés de Designer et de Connect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formats Designer==== &amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sur le serveur Mapping 9.1 et au-delà, aller dans la '''Gestion des formats Designer''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sur le menu Mapping, cliquer sur :&lt;br /&gt;
::#Gestion de formats Designer&lt;br /&gt;
::#Gestion des formats&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La liste de formats Designer opérationnels s'affiche alors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING1.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est alors possible de rentrer dans la gestion des différentes versions d'un format donné en cliquant sur le '''i''' correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La fenêtre suivante listant toutes les versions et l'historique de toutes les activations du format s'ouvre alors :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING2.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1 : Format concerné&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2 : Numéro de version du format concerné&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 : Utilisateur ayant procédé à l'importation ou au dernier rollback&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4 : Commentaire saisi lors d'un rollback&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5 : Date et heure de l'activation de la version&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6 : Date et heure de jusqu'à quand la version était active&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7 : Bouton de rollback&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Rollback de la version V4&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans cet exemple, nous allons réactiver la version V4 en cliquant sur son bouton '''Rollback''' :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING3.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Voici le résultat alors obtenu :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING4.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La version 4 du format est alors activée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Remarque&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Il est également possible d'avoir une vue d'ensemble sur tous les formats et de toutes leurs versions. Pour cela, il faut aller sur le sous-menu '''Historique des formats''' du menu '''Gestion des formats Designer'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING5.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format Connect=== &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le fonctionnement avec les formats Connect est le même qu'avec les formats Designer. Nous vous invitons à vous référer à la partie des formats Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ligne de commandes== &amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est également possible de faire du versioning en ligne de commande en utilisant le binaire '''mapobjectversioncontrol'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Exemple d'utilisation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : &lt;br /&gt;
 // Sauvegarde le projet KUHN en séquence 20 actuellement en production&lt;br /&gt;
 mapobjectversioncontrol backup &amp;quot;KUHN&amp;quot; &amp;quot;00020&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
// Restaure le projet KUHN en séquence 10 comme il était en production le 27 avril&lt;br /&gt;
 mapobjectversioncontrol restore &amp;quot;2019-04-27T23:59:59.000Z&amp;quot; &amp;quot;KUHN&amp;quot; &amp;quot;00010&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
// Liste les projets déjà versionnés&lt;br /&gt;
 mapobjectversioncontrol list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les actions ayant un impact sur le repository sont versionnées automatiquement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il sera bientôt possible de restaurer grâce au numéro de version :&lt;br /&gt;
  mapobjectversioncontrol restore &amp;quot;KUHN&amp;quot; &amp;quot;00010&amp;quot; v3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cas particulier== &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Cas des formats déjà présents===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le cas où des formats sont déjà présents dans l'environnement (créés grâce à la copie du contenu du répertoire MAP400 à partir d'un environnement sans mécanisme de versioning ou lors de l'upgrade d'une version antérieure à la V9.1), la version V0 de ce format ne sera pas sauvegardée dans le mécanisme de versioning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par conséquent, lors de l'import de la prochaine version V1 de ce format, la version V1 sera bien sauvegardée mais la V0 sera perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Afin d'éviter cela, avant d'importer la V1 du format, il faut exécuter la commande suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
 /apps/mapping/bin/mapobjectversioncontrol backup &amp;quot;format&amp;quot; &amp;quot;sequence&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cela aura pour effet de créer une entrée de la version V0 dans le mécanisme de versioning.&lt;br /&gt;
Cette version sera alors disponible dans l'interface de rollback des formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=ONYX:9.1:Utilisation:Rollback_des_formats_Designer_et_Connect&amp;diff=29798</id>
		<title>ONYX:9.1:Utilisation:Rollback des formats Designer et Connect</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=ONYX:9.1:Utilisation:Rollback_des_formats_Designer_et_Connect&amp;diff=29798"/>
		<updated>2019-12-06T17:17:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction== &amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Mapping 9.1 et au-delà intègre dans les écrans des formats Designer et Connect un module permettant la gestion de leurs différentes versions. Cette fonctionnalité donne la possibilité à l'utilisateur de remettre en action des versions précédentes de templates Designer et Connect.&lt;br /&gt;
Cela peut être très utile, par exemple, en cas de necessité de faire un rollback vers une version précédente d'un template Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prérequis== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Mapping Onyx 9.1 ou supérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Limites== &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cette fonctionnalité est disponible uniquement pour les actions de rollbacks effectuées via l'interface (non disponible lors d'utilisation des commandes map_import et map_export).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fonctionnement== &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Paramétrage===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Deux nouveaux paramètres sont apparus dans le mapping.conf: &lt;br /&gt;
# '''[VERSIONING_TOGGLE]: ''' Permet d'activer le système de rollback. &lt;br /&gt;
# '''[FORMAT_REPOSITORY_DIR_FULLPATH]''' Indique le chemin et le nom du répertoire contenant les différentes versions des formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;block name=&amp;quot;EXPERT PATH&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
           ...&lt;br /&gt;
           '''&amp;lt;info name=&amp;quot;[FORMAT_REPOSITORY_DIR_FULLPATH]&amp;quot;&amp;gt;/apps/mapping/map400/repository&amp;lt;/info&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
           ...		&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/block&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 ...&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;block name=&amp;quot;OTHERS&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
             ...&lt;br /&gt;
             '''&amp;lt;info name=&amp;quot;[VERSIONING_TOGGLE]&amp;quot;&amp;gt;YES&amp;lt;/info&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
             ...&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;/element&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/group&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/block&amp;gt;		&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces entrées sont créées automatiquement à l'installation de Mapping 9.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les valeurs par défaut à l'installation sont ''NO'' pour '''VERSIONING_TOGGLE''' et ''/home/mapping/map400/repository'' pour '''FORMAT_REPOSITORY_DIR_FULLPATH'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le répertoire repository est également créé automatiquement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interface=== &amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le versioning est disponible pour les formats importés de Designer et de Connect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formats Designer==== &amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sur le serveur Mapping 9.1 et au-delà, aller dans la '''Gestion des formats Designer''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sur le menu Mapping, cliquer sur :&lt;br /&gt;
::#Gestion de formats Designer&lt;br /&gt;
::#Gestion des formats&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La liste de formats Designer opérationnels s'affiche alors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING1.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est alors possible de rentrer dans la gestion des différentes versions d'un format donné en cliquant sur le '''i''' correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La fenêtre suivante listant toutes les versions et l'historique de toutes les activations du format s'ouvre alors :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING2.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1 : Format concerné&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2 : Numéro de version du format concerné&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 : Utilisateur ayant procédé à l'importation ou au dernier rollback&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4 : Commentaire saisi lors d'un rollback&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5 : Date et heure de l'activation de la version&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6 : Date et heure de jusqu'à quand la version était active&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
7 : Bouton de rollback&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Rollback de la version V4&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans cet exemple, nous allons réactiver la version V4 en cliquant sur son bouton '''Rollback''' :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING3.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Voici le résultat alors obtenu :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING4.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La version 4 du format est alors activée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Remarque&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : Il est également possible d'avoir une vue d'ensemble sur tous les formats et de toutes leurs versions. Pour cela, il faut aller sur le sous-menu '''Historique des formats''' du menu '''Gestion des formats Designer'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OX_S_VERSIONING5.jpg|1000px|center|sans_cadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format Connect=== &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le fonctionnement avec les formats Connect est le même qu'avec les formats Designer. Nous vous invitons à vous référer à la partie des formats Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ligne de commandes== &amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est également possible de faire du versioning en ligne de commande en utilisant le binaire '''mapobjectversioncontrol'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Exemple d'utilisation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; : &lt;br /&gt;
 // Sauvegarde le projet KUHN en séquence 20 actuellement en production&lt;br /&gt;
 mapobjectversioncontrol backup &amp;quot;KUHN&amp;quot; &amp;quot;00020&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
// Restaure le projet KUHN en séquence 10 comme il était en production le 27 avril&lt;br /&gt;
 mapobjectversioncontrol restore &amp;quot;2019-04-27T23:59:59.000Z&amp;quot; &amp;quot;KUHN&amp;quot; &amp;quot;00010&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
// Liste les projets déjà versionnés&lt;br /&gt;
 mapobjectversioncontrol list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les actions ayant un impact sur le repository sont versionnées automatiquement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il sera bientôt possible de restaurer grâce au numéro de version :&lt;br /&gt;
  mapobjectversioncontrol restore &amp;quot;KUHN&amp;quot; &amp;quot;00010&amp;quot; v3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cas particulier== &amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Cas des formats déjà présents===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le cas où des formats sont déjà présents dans l'environnement (créés grâce à la copie du contenu du répertoire MAP400 à partir d'un environnement sans mécanisme de versioning ou lors de l'upgrade d'une version antérieure à la V9.1), la version V0 de ce format ne sera pas sauvegardée dans le mécanisme de versioning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Par conséquent, lors de l'import de la prochaine version V1 de ce format, la version V1 sera bien sauvegardée mais la V0 sera perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Afin d'éviter cela, avant d'importer la V1 du format, il faut exécuter la commande suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
 /apps/mapping/bin/mapobjectversioncontrol backup &amp;quot;format&amp;quot; &amp;quot;sequence&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Cela aura pour effet de créer une entrée de la version V0 dans le mécanisme de versioning.&lt;br /&gt;
Cette version sera alors disponible dans l'interface de rollback des formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Fichier:CommitGit_02.png&amp;diff=29371</id>
		<title>Fichier:CommitGit 02.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Fichier:CommitGit_02.png&amp;diff=29371"/>
		<updated>2019-11-21T17:20:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Création d'une pull request sur github.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Fichier:CommitGit_01.png&amp;diff=29370</id>
		<title>Fichier:CommitGit 01.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.mappingsuite.com/w/index.php?title=Fichier:CommitGit_01.png&amp;diff=29370"/>
		<updated>2019-11-21T17:15:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jdobbels : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Commit direct vers un repo git&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jdobbels</name></author>
		
	</entry>
</feed>